https://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Moweez&feedformat=atomWazeopedia - User contributions [en]2024-03-28T17:40:50ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.40.2https://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places/nl&diff=24708Places/nl2020-09-22T14:28:43Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
{{hiddenh2|Plaatsen}}<br />
Plaatsen zijn nuttige en/of interessante locaties, net als de "Points of Interest" die in andere GPS systemen gebruikt worden. Ze kunnen worden toegevoegd via de Waze client en via de Waze Map Editor (WME). Waze toont plaatsen afhankelijk van type, grootte, situatie en instellingen. Als je bijvoorbeeld zoekt naar een supermarkt, zal Waze je standaard alle supermarkten in de buurt tonen. Hoe sneller je rijdt, hoe minder er wordt getoond om de kaart overzichtelijk te houden. <br />
<br />
Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.<br />
<br />
Een Plaats kan op twee manieren worden toegevoegd: Als <i>Punt</i> of als <i>Gebied</i>. Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de app, maar naar beide types kan gezocht en genavigeerd worden. Daarnaast is er nog een derde soort Plaats: de [[#Woning_ofwel_Private_Plaatsen|Woning]]. Dit zijn privé-adressen. <br />
<br />
De Waze routing server navigeert altijd naar het segment dat fysiek het dichtst bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dit ongewenste resultaten geeft, dan kun je de eindbestemming beïnvloeden door een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen.<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/punt==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Er kan wel naar gezocht worden. Dat is met name handig als ze niet of verkeerd voorkomen in andere zoekmachines.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is als een klein rondje zichtbaar in WME:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standaard Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px]] Geselecteerde Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Aangepaste Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Plaats/punt in afwachting van goedkeuring<br /><br />
<br /><br />
De <i>Plaats/punt</i> wordt op, of direct naast, de geografische locatie van de locatie gezet, zo dicht mogelijk bij het segment waar de gebruiker naar toe moet worden genavigeerd. In de meeste gevallen zal dit de (hoofd)ingang van de Plaats zijn. Bedenk waar je iemand zou afzetten als je die naar deze specifieke locatie brengt. Als deze locatie erg afwijkt van de geografische locatie, dan kun je een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toevoegen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Tracht zoveel mogelijk relevante [[Places#Places details|informatie]] toe te voegen, zoals het adres (inclusief [[house numbers|huisnummers]]), het telefoonnumber indien van toepassing, etc..<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/gebied==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Teveel <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> maken het beeld echter onduidelijk, wat de navigatie niet ten goede komt. Daarom voegen we alleen een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> toe als deze zodanig '''belangrijk en onderscheidend''' is dat het de bestuurder helpt zich te orienteren tijdens het rijden. Zie verder ook de paragraaf over wanneer je een [[Places/nl#Wanneer_gebruik_je_Gebied_en_wanneer_Punt.3F|Gebied of Punt]] gebruikt. Probeer bij het intekenen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> te voorkomen dat deze uitlijnt op of over segmenten, omdat ze dan moeilijk te bewerken zijn.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|<i>Plaats</i> voor het ziekenhuis in Namen. Het <i>toegangspunt</i> staat bij de ingang, het verplaats-icoon rechtsboven het gebouw]]<br />
<br /><br />
<b>Omtrek</b><br />
: In het algemeen omvat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> alleen wat de bestuurder ziet tijdens het rijden. Daaruit volgt dat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> met een gebouw alleen de omtrek van het gebouw omvat. Dit hoeft niet gedetailleerd; een simpele weergave voldoet en heeft de voorkeur. Natuurelementen zoals bossen, parken en meren volgen de (vanaf de weg) zichtbare contouren.<br />
: Om de contouren aan te passen veschuif je de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Wijzigen_van_kaartonderdelen|geometrie-punten op de hoeken]] (net als bij wegsegmenten). Je kunt ook het gehele gebied verplaatsen zonder de vorm te veranderen; gebruik dan het [[File:Wme_place_drag_handle.png]] verplaats-icoon.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Kleuren</b><br />
: De verschillende types <i>Plaats/gebied</i> zijn in verschillende kleuren zichtbaar, zowel in de app als in WME. De precieze kleuren zijn afhankelijk van je beeldscherm. Over het algemeen zullen natuurelementen zichtbaar zijn in groen (bijv. Park) of blauw (bijv. Rivier). <br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Navigatie</b><br />
: Het standaard navigatiedoel is het segment wat het dichts bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dat niet klopt, kun je de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen. Die kun je verplaatsen naar de plek waar je aan zou moeten komen, of waar je kunt parkeren. Bedenk waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Woning ofwel Private Plaatsen==<br />
Een <i>woning</i> is een speciaal soort <i>Plaats/punt</i>, zichtbaar als een driehoekje in WME. Bij het bereiken van een bestemming, vraagt Waze of je een foto wil nemen. Op deze manier komen vaak woonadressen als <i>Plaats</i> in WME te staan. Hiervoor is de speciale categorie <i>Residentieel</i> oftewel <i>Woning</i> gemaakt. Deze categorie wordt dus gebruikt voor alles wat een privébestemming is. Private adressen zijn niet zoekbaar. De naam van de maker wordt ook niet vermeld om de privacy te waarborgen. <i>Woningen</i> bevatten alleen een adres en eventuele foto's. De toegevoegde foto’s worden alleen getoond aan Wazers die het specifieke adres als bestemming hebben ingevoerd. De locaties kunnen door editors worden gebruikt om de adressen in de Waze database te verfijnen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Places_convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Publieke Plaatsen kunnen omgezet worden naar private Plaatsen. Andersom kan dat niet. Gebruik de link onder de knoppen voor <i>Punt</i> of <i>Gebied</i> in het menu, om <i>Plaatsen</i> die ten onrechte als publiek zijn aangemerkt, te converteren naar privé (<i>woning</i>).<br /><br />
Meer informatie vind je op de [[Residential Place]] pagina.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Toegangspunt/ het navigatiedoel==<br />
Standaard navigeert Waze je naar het segment dat het dichtst bij het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Dat is duidelijk als het een <i>Plaats/punt</i> betreft, maar bij een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> moet je vaak raden. Je kunt de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>toegangspunt</i> toe te voegen. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px]]<br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point_nl.PNG|left|80px]] Voeg een toegangspunt toe vanuit het menu links<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Je ziet vervolgens een blauwe cirkel met bewegende pijlen in het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding links). Sleep deze naar de locatie waar Waze je zou moeten brengen als je naar deze <i>Plaats</i> wordt genavigeerd. Denk aan de plek waar je zou parkeren, of waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Eenmaal het toegangspunt geplaatst, dan toont het in WME als een kleine blauwe cirkel met een pijl erin, wijzend naar de bestemming. Een onderbroken lijn verbind het toegangspunt met de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding rechts).<br />
<br /><br />
Het werken met meerdere toegangspunten is in ontwikkeling; ze kunnen vanuit de beta editor al worden aangebracht. De functie is echter nog niet stabiel. Op dit moment is het best te werken met een [[Places/nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|combinatie van een Area en Punten]] wanneer er meerdere ingangen gedefinieerd moeten worden.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Wanneer gebruik je Gebied en wanneer Punt?==<br />
De meeste Plaatsen worden ingetekend als <i>Plaats/punt</i>, tenzij ze groot en onderscheidend genoeg zijn en/of kunnen dienen ter oriëntatie tijdens het rijden. [[Parking Lot Place/nl|Parkeerplaatsen]] en [[Gas Station Place/nl|Tankstations]] vormen hierop een uitzondering. Die worden altijd als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> ingevoerd, onafhankelijk van hun grootte.<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
De pagina met het overzicht van alle [[Place categories|categorieën]] geeft ook aanwijzingen voor het intekenen van een gebied of punt, afhankelijk van het soort <i>Plaats</i>, de vermoedelijke grootte etc.. POI's die vaak wel als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> kunnen worden ingetekend zijn de categorieën Evenementencentrum, Fabriek, Ziekenhuis, Camping, Winkelcentrum, Monumenten (bijv Mardasson, Bastogne), School, Toeristische attracties, Sportpark of Stadium.<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Gecombineerde Plaatsen==<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i>]]<br />
<br /><br />
Toevoegen van <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is toegestaan. Dit wordt vaak gebruikt voor bijvoorbeeld specifieke winkels in een winkelcentrum, of faculteiten op een universiteitsterrein.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Je kunt dit ook gebruiken voor het toevoegen van geografisch verschillende ingangen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> (bijv. de aankomst- en vertrekhal van een vliegveld).<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Vermijd meerdere <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> over elkaar heen. Dit worden grote grijze gebieden en maken het beeld onduidelijk en verwarrend.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats details==<br />
Alle <i>Plaatsen</> - Punten zowel als Gebieden - moeten van zoveel mogelijk relevante informatie worden voorzien.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Algemeen"===<br />
Op het tabblad Algemeen vind je de basisinformatie: categorie(en), naam, beschrijving (mits nuttig voor navigatie), soort <i>Plaats</i> (gebied of punt) en adres. Afhankelijk van de categorie worden meer opties getoond, zoals het merk brandstof bij [[Gas_Station_Place|benzinepompen]].<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Categorie'''<br />
: Elke Plaats krijgt altijd minstens één categorie toegewezen, maar kan tot meerdere categorieën behoren. Kies dan altijd de primaire categorie eerst. Een voorbeeld: een Tankstation kan ook een winkeltje hebben, of een "Autowasstraat” of “Oplaadpaal”. Voor een gedetaileerde beschrijving van de categorieën, zie de pagina over [[Place categories|Categorieën]].<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Een Plaats kan op twee manieren worden toegevoegd: Als <i>Punt</i> of als <i>Gebied</i>. Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de app, maar naar beide types kan gezocht en genavigeerd worden. Daarnaast is er nog een derde soort Plaats: de [[#Woning_ofwel_Private_Plaatsen|Woning]]. Dit zijn privé-adressen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Beschrijving'''<br />
: Het veld <i>Beschrijving</i> mag niet worden gebruikt voor opmerkingen voor andere editors. Het is zichtbaar in de app en wordt alleen gebruikt voor aanvullende, relevante informatie over de Plaats zelf.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Toegangspunten'''<br />
: Indien nodig kun je een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|<i>toegangspunt</i>]] toevoegen, zodat Waze je naar de juiste ingang brengt.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''External providers'''<br />
: Je kunt een <i>Plaats</i> linken aan een POI van een <i>externe providers</i>, zoals Google Maps. Wanneer een <i>Plaats</i> is gelinkt, zal Waze je altijd leiden naar het [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|navigatiedoel]] zoals het in Waze gedefinieerd is, ook als het zoekresultaat uit Google Maps gebruikt wordt.<br />
<br />
Noot: Deze optie is beschikbaar vanaf Level 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
: Als er meerdere geografisch verschillende POI's in de <i>external provider</i> zijn die linken aan de Waze <i>Plaats</i>, maak dan alleen een link met de belangrijkste: Zo link je een ondergronds station met verschillende ingangen aan de hoofdingang. Voor de andere ingangen maak je dan [[Places-nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i>]] aan als ze toegevoegde waarde hebben voor de navigatie. Wanneer de verschillende POI's van de externe provider allemaal naar een ingang verwijzen, link je ze wel allemaal in één <i>Plaats</i>.<br />
<br />
Noot: er kunnen meerdere toegangspunten worden gedefinieerd bij een plaats, maar deze functie is nog niet stabiel <br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Nota: Deze functie is beschikbaar vanaf niveau 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
In de afbeelding hieronder zie je een voorbeeld van het "Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Meer info"===<br />
Op dit tabblad kun je het telefoonnummer en de website invullen. Ook kun je de openingstijden toevoegen en aanvullende faciliteiten aankruisen, zoals Wifi, Toiletten, of Parkeerplaats voor klanten (zie ook [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]). De informatie op dit tabblad is zichtbaar in de zoekresultaten. Je kunt van daaruit ook het telefoonnummer en website aanklikken, waarmee je de internet of telefoonfunctie activeert. Daarom worden ze in een bruikbaar formaat gezet:<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:Be_APP_Places_Searchresult_nl.png|thumb]]<br />
'''Website'''<br />
: Het adres van de website kan het beste worden geschreven als www.adres.extensie, zoals www.octaplus.be. Laat http:// of https:// weg. <br />
: Je kunt maar één website toevoegen. Als deze tweetalig is en je moet een keuze maken, kies dan bij voorkeur de Engelse versie als standaard.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Telefoon'''<br />
: Telefoonnummers kunnen het beste in internationaal formaat worden geschreven: In het algemeen betekent dat dat het nummer bestaat uit het landennummer, netnummer (zonder 0), en het abonneenummer, alles zonder haakjes, streepjes, enzovoorts. Opmaakspaties zijn toegestaan maar niet noodzakelijk.<br />
:'''België''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, of +32 A BBB BB BB voor vaste nummers, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB of +32 4AA BBB BBB voor mobiele nummers<br />
:'''Luxemburg''':<br />
::+352 lokaal nummer (varieert in aantal nummers en netnummers)<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Faciliteiten'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services nlbe.png|110px]] Selecteer welke faciliteiten beschikbaar zijn<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Openingstijden '''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo openinghours nl.png|110px]]Voeg zo mogelijk de openingstijden toe.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Foto's"===<br />
Wazers kunnen foto’s maken en die toevoegen aan plaatsen. Alle foto’s komen onder het tabblad ´Foto's´ terecht. Foto's kunnen alleen worden toegevoegd via de Waze app, via een [[Place update request|Place aanpassingsverzoek (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. In de editor kunnen we nieuwe foto's beoordelen en bestaande foto's bekijken en verwijderen. Denk goed na voordat je een foto verwijderd, want ze kunnen niet meer worden teruggehaald. Verwijder alleen foto's die echt onduidelijk zijn, irrelevant of ongepast. Nadere richtlijnen voor het accepteren of weggooien van foto's vind je in de algemene Wiki-pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Lock Levels==<br />
Plaatsen die belangrijk zijn voor het functioneren van Waze, zoals [[Parking Lot Place/nl|parkeerplaatsen]], moeten minstens gelocked worden op level 2 (of hoger, zoals de [[Place categories|tabel]] aangeeft), om verlies van gegevens te voorkomen. <br /><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Hulpmiddelen==<br />
* Script [[WME Place Interface Enhancements]]<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Verder lezen==<br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] kan gebruikt worden wanneer advertenties verkeerd gelocaliseerd zijn op de kaart. Verzoeken van <b>L4</b> editors worden automatisch goedgekeurd door Waze.<br />
* Zie ook de algemene wiki pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Translations:Places/1/nl&diff=24707Translations:Places/1/nl2020-09-22T14:28:43Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{hiddenh2|Plaatsen}}<br />
Plaatsen zijn nuttige en/of interessante locaties, net als de "Points of Interest" die in andere GPS systemen gebruikt worden. Ze kunnen worden toegevoegd via de Waze client en via de Waze Map Editor (WME). Waze toont plaatsen afhankelijk van type, grootte, situatie en instellingen. Als je bijvoorbeeld zoekt naar een supermarkt, zal Waze je standaard alle supermarkten in de buurt tonen. Hoe sneller je rijdt, hoe minder er wordt getoond om de kaart overzichtelijk te houden.</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places/nl&diff=24706Places/nl2020-09-22T14:26:20Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<br /><i>Plaatsen</i> zijn nuttige en/of interessante locaties, net als de "Points of Interest" die in andere GPS systemen gebruikt worden. Ze kunnen worden toegevoegd via de Waze client en via de Waze Map Editor (WME). Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.<br />
<br />
Een Plaats kan op twee manieren worden toegevoegd: Als <i>Punt</i> of als <i>Gebied</i>. Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de app, maar naar beide types kan gezocht en genavigeerd worden. Daarnaast is er nog een derde soort Plaats: de [[#Woning_ofwel_Private_Plaatsen|Woning]]. Dit zijn privé-adressen. <br />
<br />
De Waze routing server navigeert altijd naar het segment dat fysiek het dichtst bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dit ongewenste resultaten geeft, dan kun je de eindbestemming beïnvloeden door een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen.<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/punt==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Er kan wel naar gezocht worden. Dat is met name handig als ze niet of verkeerd voorkomen in andere zoekmachines.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is als een klein rondje zichtbaar in WME:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standaard Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px]] Geselecteerde Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Aangepaste Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Plaats/punt in afwachting van goedkeuring<br /><br />
<br /><br />
De <i>Plaats/punt</i> wordt op, of direct naast, de geografische locatie van de locatie gezet, zo dicht mogelijk bij het segment waar de gebruiker naar toe moet worden genavigeerd. In de meeste gevallen zal dit de (hoofd)ingang van de Plaats zijn. Bedenk waar je iemand zou afzetten als je die naar deze specifieke locatie brengt. Als deze locatie erg afwijkt van de geografische locatie, dan kun je een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toevoegen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Tracht zoveel mogelijk relevante [[Places#Places details|informatie]] toe te voegen, zoals het adres (inclusief [[house numbers|huisnummers]]), het telefoonnumber indien van toepassing, etc..<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/gebied==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Teveel <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> maken het beeld echter onduidelijk, wat de navigatie niet ten goede komt. Daarom voegen we alleen een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> toe als deze zodanig '''belangrijk en onderscheidend''' is dat het de bestuurder helpt zich te orienteren tijdens het rijden. Zie verder ook de paragraaf over wanneer je een [[Places/nl#Wanneer_gebruik_je_Gebied_en_wanneer_Punt.3F|Gebied of Punt]] gebruikt. Probeer bij het intekenen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> te voorkomen dat deze uitlijnt op of over segmenten, omdat ze dan moeilijk te bewerken zijn.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|<i>Plaats</i> voor het ziekenhuis in Namen. Het <i>toegangspunt</i> staat bij de ingang, het verplaats-icoon rechtsboven het gebouw]]<br />
<br /><br />
<b>Omtrek</b><br />
: In het algemeen omvat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> alleen wat de bestuurder ziet tijdens het rijden. Daaruit volgt dat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> met een gebouw alleen de omtrek van het gebouw omvat. Dit hoeft niet gedetailleerd; een simpele weergave voldoet en heeft de voorkeur. Natuurelementen zoals bossen, parken en meren volgen de (vanaf de weg) zichtbare contouren.<br />
: Om de contouren aan te passen veschuif je de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Wijzigen_van_kaartonderdelen|geometrie-punten op de hoeken]] (net als bij wegsegmenten). Je kunt ook het gehele gebied verplaatsen zonder de vorm te veranderen; gebruik dan het [[File:Wme_place_drag_handle.png]] verplaats-icoon.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Kleuren</b><br />
: De verschillende types <i>Plaats/gebied</i> zijn in verschillende kleuren zichtbaar, zowel in de app als in WME. De precieze kleuren zijn afhankelijk van je beeldscherm. Over het algemeen zullen natuurelementen zichtbaar zijn in groen (bijv. Park) of blauw (bijv. Rivier). <br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Navigatie</b><br />
: Het standaard navigatiedoel is het segment wat het dichts bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dat niet klopt, kun je de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen. Die kun je verplaatsen naar de plek waar je aan zou moeten komen, of waar je kunt parkeren. Bedenk waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Woning ofwel Private Plaatsen==<br />
Een <i>woning</i> is een speciaal soort <i>Plaats/punt</i>, zichtbaar als een driehoekje in WME. Bij het bereiken van een bestemming, vraagt Waze of je een foto wil nemen. Op deze manier komen vaak woonadressen als <i>Plaats</i> in WME te staan. Hiervoor is de speciale categorie <i>Residentieel</i> oftewel <i>Woning</i> gemaakt. Deze categorie wordt dus gebruikt voor alles wat een privébestemming is. Private adressen zijn niet zoekbaar. De naam van de maker wordt ook niet vermeld om de privacy te waarborgen. <i>Woningen</i> bevatten alleen een adres en eventuele foto's. De toegevoegde foto’s worden alleen getoond aan Wazers die het specifieke adres als bestemming hebben ingevoerd. De locaties kunnen door editors worden gebruikt om de adressen in de Waze database te verfijnen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Places_convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Publieke Plaatsen kunnen omgezet worden naar private Plaatsen. Andersom kan dat niet. Gebruik de link onder de knoppen voor <i>Punt</i> of <i>Gebied</i> in het menu, om <i>Plaatsen</i> die ten onrechte als publiek zijn aangemerkt, te converteren naar privé (<i>woning</i>).<br /><br />
Meer informatie vind je op de [[Residential Place]] pagina.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Toegangspunt/ het navigatiedoel==<br />
Standaard navigeert Waze je naar het segment dat het dichtst bij het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Dat is duidelijk als het een <i>Plaats/punt</i> betreft, maar bij een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> moet je vaak raden. Je kunt de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>toegangspunt</i> toe te voegen. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px]]<br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point_nl.PNG|left|80px]] Voeg een toegangspunt toe vanuit het menu links<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Je ziet vervolgens een blauwe cirkel met bewegende pijlen in het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding links). Sleep deze naar de locatie waar Waze je zou moeten brengen als je naar deze <i>Plaats</i> wordt genavigeerd. Denk aan de plek waar je zou parkeren, of waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Eenmaal het toegangspunt geplaatst, dan toont het in WME als een kleine blauwe cirkel met een pijl erin, wijzend naar de bestemming. Een onderbroken lijn verbind het toegangspunt met de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding rechts).<br />
<br /><br />
Het werken met meerdere toegangspunten is in ontwikkeling; ze kunnen vanuit de beta editor al worden aangebracht. De functie is echter nog niet stabiel. Op dit moment is het best te werken met een [[Places/nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|combinatie van een Area en Punten]] wanneer er meerdere ingangen gedefinieerd moeten worden.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Wanneer gebruik je Gebied en wanneer Punt?==<br />
De meeste Plaatsen worden ingetekend als <i>Plaats/punt</i>, tenzij ze groot en onderscheidend genoeg zijn en/of kunnen dienen ter oriëntatie tijdens het rijden. [[Parking Lot Place/nl|Parkeerplaatsen]] en [[Gas Station Place/nl|Tankstations]] vormen hierop een uitzondering. Die worden altijd als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> ingevoerd, onafhankelijk van hun grootte.<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
De pagina met het overzicht van alle [[Place categories|categorieën]] geeft ook aanwijzingen voor het intekenen van een gebied of punt, afhankelijk van het soort <i>Plaats</i>, de vermoedelijke grootte etc.. POI's die vaak wel als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> kunnen worden ingetekend zijn de categorieën Evenementencentrum, Fabriek, Ziekenhuis, Camping, Winkelcentrum, Monumenten (bijv Mardasson, Bastogne), School, Toeristische attracties, Sportpark of Stadium.<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Gecombineerde Plaatsen==<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i>]]<br />
<br /><br />
Toevoegen van <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is toegestaan. Dit wordt vaak gebruikt voor bijvoorbeeld specifieke winkels in een winkelcentrum, of faculteiten op een universiteitsterrein.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Je kunt dit ook gebruiken voor het toevoegen van geografisch verschillende ingangen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> (bijv. de aankomst- en vertrekhal van een vliegveld).<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Vermijd meerdere <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> over elkaar heen. Dit worden grote grijze gebieden en maken het beeld onduidelijk en verwarrend.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats details==<br />
Alle <i>Plaatsen</> - Punten zowel als Gebieden - moeten van zoveel mogelijk relevante informatie worden voorzien.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Algemeen"===<br />
Op het tabblad Algemeen vind je de basisinformatie: categorie(en), naam, beschrijving (mits nuttig voor navigatie), soort <i>Plaats</i> (gebied of punt) en adres. Afhankelijk van de categorie worden meer opties getoond, zoals het merk brandstof bij [[Gas_Station_Place|benzinepompen]].<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Categorie'''<br />
: Elke Plaats krijgt altijd minstens één categorie toegewezen, maar kan tot meerdere categorieën behoren. Kies dan altijd de primaire categorie eerst. Een voorbeeld: een Tankstation kan ook een winkeltje hebben, of een "Autowasstraat” of “Oplaadpaal”. Voor een gedetaileerde beschrijving van de categorieën, zie de pagina over [[Place categories|Categorieën]].<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Naam en adres'''<br />
: Als de gegevens vindbaar zijn, geef dan de <i>naam</i> en het <i>adres</i>. Het benoemen van een <i>Plaats</i> gebeurt in de formele taal van de locatie; gebruik de officiele naam. In tweetalige gebieden gebruik je de alternatieve naam voor de andere taal. Met name het adres is handig om naar de locatie te navigeren. Voeg ook andere belangrijke informatie toe, zoals het merk benzine bij tankstations.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Beschrijving'''<br />
: Het veld <i>Beschrijving</i> mag niet worden gebruikt voor opmerkingen voor andere editors. Het is zichtbaar in de app en wordt alleen gebruikt voor aanvullende, relevante informatie over de Plaats zelf.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Toegangspunten'''<br />
: Indien nodig kun je een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|<i>toegangspunt</i>]] toevoegen, zodat Waze je naar de juiste ingang brengt.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''External providers'''<br />
: Je kunt een <i>Plaats</i> linken aan een POI van een <i>externe providers</i>, zoals Google Maps. Wanneer een <i>Plaats</i> is gelinkt, zal Waze je altijd leiden naar het [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|navigatiedoel]] zoals het in Waze gedefinieerd is, ook als het zoekresultaat uit Google Maps gebruikt wordt.<br />
<br />
Noot: Deze optie is beschikbaar vanaf Level 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
: Als er meerdere geografisch verschillende POI's in de <i>external provider</i> zijn die linken aan de Waze <i>Plaats</i>, maak dan alleen een link met de belangrijkste: Zo link je een ondergronds station met verschillende ingangen aan de hoofdingang. Voor de andere ingangen maak je dan [[Places-nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i>]] aan als ze toegevoegde waarde hebben voor de navigatie. Wanneer de verschillende POI's van de externe provider allemaal naar een ingang verwijzen, link je ze wel allemaal in één <i>Plaats</i>.<br />
<br />
Noot: er kunnen meerdere toegangspunten worden gedefinieerd bij een plaats, maar deze functie is nog niet stabiel <br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Nota: Deze functie is beschikbaar vanaf niveau 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
In de afbeelding hieronder zie je een voorbeeld van het "Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Meer info"===<br />
Op dit tabblad kun je het telefoonnummer en de website invullen. Ook kun je de openingstijden toevoegen en aanvullende faciliteiten aankruisen, zoals Wifi, Toiletten, of Parkeerplaats voor klanten (zie ook [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]). De informatie op dit tabblad is zichtbaar in de zoekresultaten. Je kunt van daaruit ook het telefoonnummer en website aanklikken, waarmee je de internet of telefoonfunctie activeert. Daarom worden ze in een bruikbaar formaat gezet:<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:Be_APP_Places_Searchresult_nl.png|thumb]]<br />
'''Website'''<br />
: Het adres van de website kan het beste worden geschreven als www.adres.extensie, zoals www.octaplus.be. Laat http:// of https:// weg. <br />
: Je kunt maar één website toevoegen. Als deze tweetalig is en je moet een keuze maken, kies dan bij voorkeur de Engelse versie als standaard.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Telefoon'''<br />
: Telefoonnummers kunnen het beste in internationaal formaat worden geschreven: In het algemeen betekent dat dat het nummer bestaat uit het landennummer, netnummer (zonder 0), en het abonneenummer, alles zonder haakjes, streepjes, enzovoorts. Opmaakspaties zijn toegestaan maar niet noodzakelijk.<br />
:'''België''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, of +32 A BBB BB BB voor vaste nummers, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB of +32 4AA BBB BBB voor mobiele nummers<br />
:'''Luxemburg''':<br />
::+352 lokaal nummer (varieert in aantal nummers en netnummers)<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Faciliteiten'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services nlbe.png|110px]] Selecteer welke faciliteiten beschikbaar zijn<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Openingstijden '''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo openinghours nl.png|110px]]Voeg zo mogelijk de openingstijden toe.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Foto's"===<br />
Wazers kunnen foto’s maken en die toevoegen aan plaatsen. Alle foto’s komen onder het tabblad ´Foto's´ terecht. Foto's kunnen alleen worden toegevoegd via de Waze app, via een [[Place update request|Place aanpassingsverzoek (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. In de editor kunnen we nieuwe foto's beoordelen en bestaande foto's bekijken en verwijderen. Denk goed na voordat je een foto verwijderd, want ze kunnen niet meer worden teruggehaald. Verwijder alleen foto's die echt onduidelijk zijn, irrelevant of ongepast. Nadere richtlijnen voor het accepteren of weggooien van foto's vind je in de algemene Wiki-pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Lock Levels==<br />
Plaatsen die belangrijk zijn voor het functioneren van Waze, zoals [[Parking Lot Place/nl|parkeerplaatsen]], moeten minstens gelocked worden op level 2 (of hoger, zoals de [[Place categories|tabel]] aangeeft), om verlies van gegevens te voorkomen. <br /><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Hulpmiddelen==<br />
* Script [[WME Place Interface Enhancements]]<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Verder lezen==<br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] kan gebruikt worden wanneer advertenties verkeerd gelocaliseerd zijn op de kaart. Verzoeken van <b>L4</b> editors worden automatisch goedgekeurd door Waze.<br />
* Zie ook de algemene wiki pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Translations:Places/34/nl&diff=24705Translations:Places/34/nl2020-09-22T14:26:19Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>Een Plaats kan op twee manieren worden toegevoegd: Als <i>Punt</i> of als <i>Gebied</i>. Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de app, maar naar beide types kan gezocht en genavigeerd worden. Daarnaast is er nog een derde soort Plaats: de [[#Woning_ofwel_Private_Plaatsen|Woning]]. Dit zijn privé-adressen.</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places/nl&diff=24704Places/nl2020-09-22T14:25:40Z<p>Moweez: Created page with "Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de Snelstartgids. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen..."</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<br /><i>Plaatsen</i> zijn nuttige en/of interessante locaties, net als de "Points of Interest" die in andere GPS systemen gebruikt worden. Ze kunnen worden toegevoegd via de Waze client en via de Waze Map Editor (WME). Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Een Plaats kan op twee manieren worden toegevoegd: Als <i>Punt</i> of als <i>Gebied</i>. Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de app, maar naar beide types kan gezocht en genavigeerd worden. Daarnaast is er nog een derde soort Plaats: de [[Places/nl#Woning_ofwel_Private_Plaatsen|Woning]]. Dit zijn privé-adressen.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
De Waze routing server navigeert altijd naar het segment dat fysiek het dichtst bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dit ongewenste resultaten geeft, dan kun je de eindbestemming beïnvloeden door een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen.<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/punt==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is niet zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Er kan wel naar gezocht worden. Dat is met name handig als ze niet of verkeerd voorkomen in andere zoekmachines.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Een <i>Plaats/punt</i> is als een klein rondje zichtbaar in WME:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standaard Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px]] Geselecteerde Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Aangepaste Plaats/punt<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Plaats/punt in afwachting van goedkeuring<br /><br />
<br /><br />
De <i>Plaats/punt</i> wordt op, of direct naast, de geografische locatie van de locatie gezet, zo dicht mogelijk bij het segment waar de gebruiker naar toe moet worden genavigeerd. In de meeste gevallen zal dit de (hoofd)ingang van de Plaats zijn. Bedenk waar je iemand zou afzetten als je die naar deze specifieke locatie brengt. Als deze locatie erg afwijkt van de geografische locatie, dan kun je een [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toevoegen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Tracht zoveel mogelijk relevante [[Places#Places details|informatie]] toe te voegen, zoals het adres (inclusief [[house numbers|huisnummers]]), het telefoonnumber indien van toepassing, etc..<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats/gebied==<br />
Een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is zichtbaar in de navigatie app. Teveel <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> maken het beeld echter onduidelijk, wat de navigatie niet ten goede komt. Daarom voegen we alleen een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> toe als deze zodanig '''belangrijk en onderscheidend''' is dat het de bestuurder helpt zich te orienteren tijdens het rijden. Zie verder ook de paragraaf over wanneer je een [[Places/nl#Wanneer_gebruik_je_Gebied_en_wanneer_Punt.3F|Gebied of Punt]] gebruikt. Probeer bij het intekenen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> te voorkomen dat deze uitlijnt op of over segmenten, omdat ze dan moeilijk te bewerken zijn.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|<i>Plaats</i> voor het ziekenhuis in Namen. Het <i>toegangspunt</i> staat bij de ingang, het verplaats-icoon rechtsboven het gebouw]]<br />
<br /><br />
<b>Omtrek</b><br />
: In het algemeen omvat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> alleen wat de bestuurder ziet tijdens het rijden. Daaruit volgt dat een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> met een gebouw alleen de omtrek van het gebouw omvat. Dit hoeft niet gedetailleerd; een simpele weergave voldoet en heeft de voorkeur. Natuurelementen zoals bossen, parken en meren volgen de (vanaf de weg) zichtbare contouren.<br />
: Om de contouren aan te passen veschuif je de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Wijzigen_van_kaartonderdelen|geometrie-punten op de hoeken]] (net als bij wegsegmenten). Je kunt ook het gehele gebied verplaatsen zonder de vorm te veranderen; gebruik dan het [[File:Wme_place_drag_handle.png]] verplaats-icoon.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Kleuren</b><br />
: De verschillende types <i>Plaats/gebied</i> zijn in verschillende kleuren zichtbaar, zowel in de app als in WME. De precieze kleuren zijn afhankelijk van je beeldscherm. Over het algemeen zullen natuurelementen zichtbaar zijn in groen (bijv. Park) of blauw (bijv. Rivier). <br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
<b>Navigatie</b><br />
: Het standaard navigatiedoel is het segment wat het dichts bij het centrum van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Als dat niet klopt, kun je de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|toegangspunt]] toe te voegen. Die kun je verplaatsen naar de plek waar je aan zou moeten komen, of waar je kunt parkeren. Bedenk waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Woning ofwel Private Plaatsen==<br />
Een <i>woning</i> is een speciaal soort <i>Plaats/punt</i>, zichtbaar als een driehoekje in WME. Bij het bereiken van een bestemming, vraagt Waze of je een foto wil nemen. Op deze manier komen vaak woonadressen als <i>Plaats</i> in WME te staan. Hiervoor is de speciale categorie <i>Residentieel</i> oftewel <i>Woning</i> gemaakt. Deze categorie wordt dus gebruikt voor alles wat een privébestemming is. Private adressen zijn niet zoekbaar. De naam van de maker wordt ook niet vermeld om de privacy te waarborgen. <i>Woningen</i> bevatten alleen een adres en eventuele foto's. De toegevoegde foto’s worden alleen getoond aan Wazers die het specifieke adres als bestemming hebben ingevoerd. De locaties kunnen door editors worden gebruikt om de adressen in de Waze database te verfijnen.<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:WME_Places_convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Publieke Plaatsen kunnen omgezet worden naar private Plaatsen. Andersom kan dat niet. Gebruik de link onder de knoppen voor <i>Punt</i> of <i>Gebied</i> in het menu, om <i>Plaatsen</i> die ten onrechte als publiek zijn aangemerkt, te converteren naar privé (<i>woning</i>).<br /><br />
Meer informatie vind je op de [[Residential Place]] pagina.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Toegangspunt/ het navigatiedoel==<br />
Standaard navigeert Waze je naar het segment dat het dichtst bij het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> ligt. Dat is duidelijk als het een <i>Plaats/punt</i> betreft, maar bij een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> moet je vaak raden. Je kunt de bestemming wijzigen door een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>toegangspunt</i> toe te voegen. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px]]<br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point_nl.PNG|left|80px]] Voeg een toegangspunt toe vanuit het menu links<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:WME-add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Je ziet vervolgens een blauwe cirkel met bewegende pijlen in het midden van de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding links). Sleep deze naar de locatie waar Waze je zou moeten brengen als je naar deze <i>Plaats</i> wordt genavigeerd. Denk aan de plek waar je zou parkeren, of waar je zou stoppen als je iemand afzet voor deze locatie.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Eenmaal het toegangspunt geplaatst, dan toont het in WME als een kleine blauwe cirkel met een pijl erin, wijzend naar de bestemming. Een onderbroken lijn verbind het toegangspunt met de <i>Plaats</i> (afbeelding rechts).<br />
<br /><br />
Het werken met meerdere toegangspunten is in ontwikkeling; ze kunnen vanuit de beta editor al worden aangebracht. De functie is echter nog niet stabiel. Op dit moment is het best te werken met een [[Places/nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|combinatie van een Area en Punten]] wanneer er meerdere ingangen gedefinieerd moeten worden.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Wanneer gebruik je Gebied en wanneer Punt?==<br />
De meeste Plaatsen worden ingetekend als <i>Plaats/punt</i>, tenzij ze groot en onderscheidend genoeg zijn en/of kunnen dienen ter oriëntatie tijdens het rijden. [[Parking Lot Place/nl|Parkeerplaatsen]] en [[Gas Station Place/nl|Tankstations]] vormen hierop een uitzondering. Die worden altijd als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> ingevoerd, onafhankelijk van hun grootte.<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
De pagina met het overzicht van alle [[Place categories|categorieën]] geeft ook aanwijzingen voor het intekenen van een gebied of punt, afhankelijk van het soort <i>Plaats</i>, de vermoedelijke grootte etc.. POI's die vaak wel als <i>Plaats/gebied</i> kunnen worden ingetekend zijn de categorieën Evenementencentrum, Fabriek, Ziekenhuis, Camping, Winkelcentrum, Monumenten (bijv Mardasson, Bastogne), School, Toeristische attracties, Sportpark of Stadium.<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Gecombineerde Plaatsen==<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i>]]<br />
<br /><br />
Toevoegen van <i>Plaats/punten</i> in een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> is toegestaan. Dit wordt vaak gebruikt voor bijvoorbeeld specifieke winkels in een winkelcentrum, of faculteiten op een universiteitsterrein.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Je kunt dit ook gebruiken voor het toevoegen van geografisch verschillende ingangen van een <i>Plaats/gebied</i> (bijv. de aankomst- en vertrekhal van een vliegveld).<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Vermijd meerdere <i>Plaats/gebieden</i> over elkaar heen. Dit worden grote grijze gebieden en maken het beeld onduidelijk en verwarrend.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Plaats details==<br />
Alle <i>Plaatsen</> - Punten zowel als Gebieden - moeten van zoveel mogelijk relevante informatie worden voorzien.<br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Algemeen"===<br />
Op het tabblad Algemeen vind je de basisinformatie: categorie(en), naam, beschrijving (mits nuttig voor navigatie), soort <i>Plaats</i> (gebied of punt) en adres. Afhankelijk van de categorie worden meer opties getoond, zoals het merk brandstof bij [[Gas_Station_Place|benzinepompen]].<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Categorie'''<br />
: Elke Plaats krijgt altijd minstens één categorie toegewezen, maar kan tot meerdere categorieën behoren. Kies dan altijd de primaire categorie eerst. Een voorbeeld: een Tankstation kan ook een winkeltje hebben, of een "Autowasstraat” of “Oplaadpaal”. Voor een gedetaileerde beschrijving van de categorieën, zie de pagina over [[Place categories|Categorieën]].<br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Naam en adres'''<br />
: Als de gegevens vindbaar zijn, geef dan de <i>naam</i> en het <i>adres</i>. Het benoemen van een <i>Plaats</i> gebeurt in de formele taal van de locatie; gebruik de officiele naam. In tweetalige gebieden gebruik je de alternatieve naam voor de andere taal. Met name het adres is handig om naar de locatie te navigeren. Voeg ook andere belangrijke informatie toe, zoals het merk benzine bij tankstations.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Beschrijving'''<br />
: Het veld <i>Beschrijving</i> mag niet worden gebruikt voor opmerkingen voor andere editors. Het is zichtbaar in de app en wordt alleen gebruikt voor aanvullende, relevante informatie over de Plaats zelf.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Toegangspunten'''<br />
: Indien nodig kun je een [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|<i>toegangspunt</i>]] toevoegen, zodat Waze je naar de juiste ingang brengt.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''External providers'''<br />
: Je kunt een <i>Plaats</i> linken aan een POI van een <i>externe providers</i>, zoals Google Maps. Wanneer een <i>Plaats</i> is gelinkt, zal Waze je altijd leiden naar het [[Places/nl#Toegangspunt.2F_het_navigatiedoel|navigatiedoel]] zoals het in Waze gedefinieerd is, ook als het zoekresultaat uit Google Maps gebruikt wordt.<br />
<br />
Noot: Deze optie is beschikbaar vanaf Level 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
: Als er meerdere geografisch verschillende POI's in de <i>external provider</i> zijn die linken aan de Waze <i>Plaats</i>, maak dan alleen een link met de belangrijkste: Zo link je een ondergronds station met verschillende ingangen aan de hoofdingang. Voor de andere ingangen maak je dan [[Places-nl#Gecombineerde Plaatsen|meerdere <i>Plaats/punten</i>]] aan als ze toegevoegde waarde hebben voor de navigatie. Wanneer de verschillende POI's van de externe provider allemaal naar een ingang verwijzen, link je ze wel allemaal in één <i>Plaats</i>.<br />
<br />
Noot: er kunnen meerdere toegangspunten worden gedefinieerd bij een plaats, maar deze functie is nog niet stabiel <br /><br />
</div> <br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
Nota: Deze functie is beschikbaar vanaf niveau 2<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
In de afbeelding hieronder zie je een voorbeeld van het "Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br /><br />
<br /><br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Meer info"===<br />
Op dit tabblad kun je het telefoonnummer en de website invullen. Ook kun je de openingstijden toevoegen en aanvullende faciliteiten aankruisen, zoals Wifi, Toiletten, of Parkeerplaats voor klanten (zie ook [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]). De informatie op dit tabblad is zichtbaar in de zoekresultaten. Je kunt van daaruit ook het telefoonnummer en website aanklikken, waarmee je de internet of telefoonfunctie activeert. Daarom worden ze in een bruikbaar formaat gezet:<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
[[File:Be_APP_Places_Searchresult_nl.png|thumb]]<br />
'''Website'''<br />
: Het adres van de website kan het beste worden geschreven als www.adres.extensie, zoals www.octaplus.be. Laat http:// of https:// weg. <br />
: Je kunt maar één website toevoegen. Als deze tweetalig is en je moet een keuze maken, kies dan bij voorkeur de Engelse versie als standaard.<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Telefoon'''<br />
: Telefoonnummers kunnen het beste in internationaal formaat worden geschreven: In het algemeen betekent dat dat het nummer bestaat uit het landennummer, netnummer (zonder 0), en het abonneenummer, alles zonder haakjes, streepjes, enzovoorts. Opmaakspaties zijn toegestaan maar niet noodzakelijk.<br />
:'''België''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, of +32 A BBB BB BB voor vaste nummers, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB of +32 4AA BBB BBB voor mobiele nummers<br />
:'''Luxemburg''':<br />
::+352 lokaal nummer (varieert in aantal nummers en netnummers)<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Faciliteiten'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services nlbe.png|110px]] Selecteer welke faciliteiten beschikbaar zijn<br /><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
'''Openingstijden '''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo openinghours nl.png|110px]]Voeg zo mogelijk de openingstijden toe.<br />
<div style="clear: both"></div><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''back to the Table of Content''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
===tabblad "Foto's"===<br />
Wazers kunnen foto’s maken en die toevoegen aan plaatsen. Alle foto’s komen onder het tabblad ´Foto's´ terecht. Foto's kunnen alleen worden toegevoegd via de Waze app, via een [[Place update request|Place aanpassingsverzoek (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. In de editor kunnen we nieuwe foto's beoordelen en bestaande foto's bekijken en verwijderen. Denk goed na voordat je een foto verwijderd, want ze kunnen niet meer worden teruggehaald. Verwijder alleen foto's die echt onduidelijk zijn, irrelevant of ongepast. Nadere richtlijnen voor het accepteren of weggooien van foto's vind je in de algemene Wiki-pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Lock Levels==<br />
Plaatsen die belangrijk zijn voor het functioneren van Waze, zoals [[Parking Lot Place/nl|parkeerplaatsen]], moeten minstens gelocked worden op level 2 (of hoger, zoals de [[Place categories|tabel]] aangeeft), om verlies van gegevens te voorkomen. <br /><br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Hulpmiddelen==<br />
* Script [[WME Place Interface Enhancements]]<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div><br />
<br />
<div class="mw-translate-fuzzy"><br />
==Verder lezen==<br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] kan gebruikt worden wanneer advertenties verkeerd gelocaliseerd zijn op de kaart. Verzoeken van <b>L4</b> editors worden automatisch goedgekeurd door Waze.<br />
* Zie ook de algemene wiki pagina over [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places] (Engels).<br />
<div style="text-align: right; direction: ltr; margin-left: 1em;">[[#toc|<small>''terug naar de Inhoudsopgave''</small>]]</div><br />
</div> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Translations:Places/44/nl&diff=24703Translations:Places/44/nl2020-09-22T14:25:40Z<p>Moweez: Created page with "Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de Snelstartgids. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen..."</p>
<hr />
<div>Hoe je een <i>Plaats</i> toevoegt staat beschreven in de [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_plaats_toevoegen|Snelstartgids]]. Een beschrijving van de verschillende soorten <i>Plaatsen</i> vind je op de [[Place categories]] pagina.</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places&diff=24643Places2020-09-22T14:21:58Z<p>Moweez: Marked this version for translation</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
<!--T:44--><br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
<!--T:45--><br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
<!--T:46--><br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<!--T:47--><br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
<!--T:48--><br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
<!--T:49--><br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
<!--T:50--><br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
<!--T:51--><br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
<!--T:52--><br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:53--><br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
<!--T:54--><br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
<!--T:55--><br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
<!--T:56--><br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
<!--T:57--><br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<!--T:58--><br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
<!--T:59--><br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:60--><br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
<!--T:61--><br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
<!--T:62--><br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:63--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
<!--T:64--><br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
<!--T:65--><br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places&diff=24642Places2020-09-22T14:21:34Z<p>Moweez: translation unit correction</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Places&diff=24641User:Moweez/Places2020-09-22T14:18:17Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Places&diff=24640Places2020-09-22T14:15:41Z<p>Moweez: updated according to proposal page</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Places&diff=24639User:Moweez/Places2020-09-22T14:13:23Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Places&diff=24638User:Moweez/Places2020-09-22T14:11:47Z<p>Moweez: lay-out</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Places&diff=24636User:Moweez/Places2020-09-22T14:08:30Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing-2.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i> as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.<br />
-->{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Place_categories&diff=24635User:Moweez/Place categories2020-09-22T14:00:43Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Place categories}} <!--T:1--><br />
Waze has several major categories, which in turn includes quite a number of sub categories. If you choose a main category within WME, you automatically get to see the sub-categories to choose from. It is also possible to directly type in a category. <br />
<br />
The [[Places|Place]] categories used in Waze are not always directly applicable in BeLux, for they are global categories. At this time, it is not possible to adapt these categories to local customs. If you cannot find an applicable sub category, just use the main category and add the [[#Missing_Categories|missing category]] in front of the name in the alternate name field. <br />
<br />
This overview shows the categories used for the [[Places|Waze Places]]. For mapping guidelines, please read the page about [[User:Moweez/Places| Places]].<br />
<br />
Note that circumstances may require a different approach. The different regions use a different locking strategy (see table below). In any case, if a Place needs more protection, a higher lock level can be used.<br />
<br />
{{anchor|region}}<br />
==Regional differences==<br />
{| class="wikitable" border="0" bgcolor="#a7d2df"<br />
! colspan="5" width="99%" | Regional guidelines<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Flanders</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" |<b>Brussels</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Wallonia</b><br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Luxembourg</b><br />
|-<br />
<!--|Name <br />
| The use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] is discouraged<br />
| Use French as main name, Flemish as alternate name<br />
| preference for the use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] if available<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
|type <br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
|- --><br />
| lock <br />
| If a lock is required, the minimum lock level is described in the tables below.<br />
| Places may be locked at L3 or higher when considered completed. In any case, do not reduce the lock of complete POIs.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Categories==<br />
=== {{@|Parking Lot}} === <!--T:2--><br />
{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! || Parking {Name} || 2 <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Car Services}} === <!--T:3--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Always map as an Area of more than 500m<sup>2</sup>! <br><br> Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field. || { picto} + {Brand} + {Name}, e.g., <br>Main name: ⛽️ Shell VanPé (this name can be found on the brand's website) <br>Alternative: ⛽️ Shell Nandrain (locality name if different from the official name) || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer <br />
| {Brand} + {Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} + {MaxPower} + ({Amount}) || 3<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Transportation}} === <!--T:4--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Airport || You can replace "airport" in the name with the picto ✈, but the picto should be in front <br />
|{Name}, e.g.,<br />
: Brussels Airport<br />
: ✈ Brussels <br />
| 3<br />
|-<br />
| Bus Station || <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {Location} + {Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': <br />
:-in large cities:<br><br />
: {station name} + ({operator})<br />
:-outside large cities:<br />
: {city} + {station name} + ({operator})<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Ferry Pier || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Seaport / Marina / Harbor || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Subway Station || Underground Station for or Metro. Put the city name in front of the station name if different <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {City} + {Station Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Train Station || e.g., Station Antwerpen<br />
| <br />
*'''Fl?''': "Station" + {station name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
: alternate name:<br><br />
: "Station" + {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Bridge || Use only to represent a named road bridge with local or navigational significance || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Tunnel || || {Tunnel Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Taxi Station || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Junction / Interchange || || Junction {Name} || <br />
|- <br />
| Rest area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Carpool spot || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| <i>others / without sub category</i> || all other POIs belonging to transportation, and not to car services. Examples:<br> || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || Car Sharing & Bike Sharing Stations || {operator} + {station name} || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Professional and public}}=== <!--T:5--><br />
For public buildings or services such as fire departments, town halls and the like, we write the location after the name of the building or service, e.g., Stadhuis Antwerpen. For Organisations that have several locations, specify the location after a hyphen, after the general name of the organisation, e.g., UZ leuven - campus Gasthuisberg.<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Cemetery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| City Hall || local name use || {Building/Service} {Municipality} || <br />
|-<br />
| College / University || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Conventions / Event Center || || ||<br />
|- <br />
| Courthouse || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Doctor / Clinic || Use this category for non-urgent medical care. See for urgent medical care ''Hospital / Medical Care'' below || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Embassy / Consulate || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Emergency shelter || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Factory / industrial || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fire department || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Government || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Hospital / Urgent Care || Hospitals, First Aid Posts and other places that offer emergency aid. Use ''Doctor / Clinic'' for non-urgent medical care || || <br />
|-<br />
| Information point || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Kindergarten || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Library || || {City} {location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Military || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Offices || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Organization or Association || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Police Station || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Prison / Correctional Facility || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Post Office || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Religious Center | || || <br />
|-<br />
| School || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Trash & Recycling facility|| || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Shopping and services}}===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Arts and Crafts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| [[ATM Place|ATM]] || Use the translation for ATM, followed by the brand, e.g., "Geldautomaat SNS Bank" || ATM {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bank / Financial || || {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bookstore || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Dealership || In case there is a gas station, use ''Gas Station'' as the primary category unless they have different opening times || {Brand} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Car rental || Rental-car facilities and returns, including at airports, should be marked as a Point with the “Rental Car” Place category. If the return location is a normal Parking Lot, then mark it with the [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] category and the building with the Car Rental category<br />
|| ||<br />
|-<br />
| Convenience Store || like a kiosk || || <br />
|-<br />
| Currency Exchange || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Department Store || like De Bijenkorf? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Electronics || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fashion and Clothing || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Flowers || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Furniture / Home Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Gifts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Gym / Fitness || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hardware Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Jewelry || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Laundry / Dry Cleaning || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Market || || {City} {Location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Music Store || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Personal Care || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pet Store / Veterinarian || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pharmacy || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Photography || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Shopping Center || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sporting Goods || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Supermarket / Grocery || Delhaize. Intermarché, Lidl || {Brand} {Location} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swimming Pool || solely public swimming pools || || <br />
|-<br />
| Toy Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Travel Agency || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Food and Drink}} === <!--T:6--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bakery || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bar || Note: a "Plaza" is not a Place (in French) but a food court/food market. || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Coffee shop || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dessert || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fast Food || McDonald's may include drive-thru, then draw [[Parking Lot Road]] || || <br />
|-<br />
| Food Court || Can be used for a caterer or a wholesaler || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ice Cream || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Restaurant || || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Culture and Entertainment}} === <!--T:7--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Art Gallery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Casino || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Club || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Game Club || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Movie Theater || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Museum || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Music Venue || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Performing Arts Venue || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Racing Track || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Stadium / Arena || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Theme Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Theater || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Tourist Attraction / Historic Site || If the place functions as a landmark it may be represented as an Area Place || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Zoo / Aquarium || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Other}} === <!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Construction Site || Construction sites are not necessariliy mapped but it may be useful for editors checking roadworks under way. Ask your Country Manager in case of doubt || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || General category for all landmarks you can't find an existing suitable category for; add the missing category in front of the name || {missing category} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Lodging}} === <!--T:9--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bed & Breakfast || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Camping / Trailer Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Cottage / Cabin || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hostel || Used for Motels and Inns in the BeLux || F1 hotel Waalwijk ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hotel || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Outdoors}} === <!--T:10--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Beach || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Golf Course || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Park || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Playground || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Plaza || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pool || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Promenade || Probably not used in the BeLux || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Scenic Lookout / Viewpoint || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ski Area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Sports Court || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Natural features}} === <!--T:11--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Farm || Farmlands should <i>never</i> be mapped as areas. Editors should remove farmland areas immediately.?? || || <br />
|-<br />
| Forest / Grove || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Island || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| River / Stream || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? Features under approximately 20 meters wide will not be visible in the Waze app. Handy tool for drawing rivers: street to river || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sea / Lake / Pool || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Canal || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swamp / Marsh || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dam || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@| Missing Categories}} ==<br />
If you cannot find a suitable category, choose the most applicable category. You can add the missing category in front of the name in the alternate name field.<br><br />
Example: Butcher Sans Os<br><br />
*main Waze Category: ''Supermarket/Grocery''. <br />
* Primary name: "Sans Os". <br />
* alternate name: "butcher Sans Os"<br />
Note that when the name in itself is clear enough indicative for the kind of Place (ING, Décathlon, Carrefour, etc.) there is no need to put a category in front of the name. <br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! category !! style="width: 30%" | WME Category to use !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
|Community center || Conventions / Event center || primary: {Name}<br>alternate: {missing category} + {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|Village hall ||Conventions / Event center || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Dentist || Doctor / Clinic || || <br />
|-<br />
|Residential care centers || Personale Care || || <br />
|-<br />
|Butcher || Supermarket/Grocery || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} ==<br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality Places,such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum].<br />
* <b>WME Split POI script</b> This script adds a button to the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] that allows you to split or cut Places from the category <i>Natural Features</i> into two, keeping the specifics. Can be used for all Natural Features like Island, Sea/Lake/Pool, River/Stream, Forest/Grove, Farm, Canal, Swamp / Marsh, Dam<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Description and discussion on the forum]<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Place_categories&diff=24634User:Moweez/Place categories2020-09-22T13:59:16Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Place categories}} <!--T:1--><br />
Waze has several major categories, which in turn includes quite a number of sub categories. If you choose a main category within WME, you automatically get to see the sub-categories to choose from. It is also possible to directly type in a category. <br />
<br />
The [[Places|Place]] categories used in Waze are not always directly applicable in BeLux, for they are global categories. At this time, it is not possible to adapt these categories to local customs. If you cannot find an applicable sub category, just use the main category and add the [[#Missing_Categories|missing category]] in front of the name in the alternate name field. <br />
<br />
This overview shows the categories used for the [[Places|Waze Places]]. For mapping guidelines, please read the page about [[User:Moweez/Places| Places]].<br />
<br />
Note that circumstances may require a different approach. The different regions use a different locking strategy (see table below). In any case, if a Place needs more protection, a higher lock level can be used.<br />
<br />
{{anchor|region}}<br />
==Regional differences==<br />
{| class="wikitable" border="0" bgcolor="#a7d2df"<br />
! colspan="5" width="99%" | Regional guidelines<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Flanders</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" |<b>Brussels</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Wallonia</b><br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Luxembourg</b><br />
|-<br />
<!--|Name <br />
| The use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] is discouraged<br />
| Use French as main name, Flemish as alternate name<br />
| preference for the use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] if available<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
|type <br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
|- --><br />
| lock <br />
| If a lock is required, the minimum lock level is described in the tables below.<br />
| Places may be locked at L3 or higher when considered completed. In any case, do not reduce the lock of complete POIs.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Categories==<br />
=== {{@|Parking Lot}} === <!--T:2--><br />
{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! || Parking {Name} || 2 <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Car Services}} === <!--T:3--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Always map as an Area of more than 500m<sup>2</sup>! <br><br> Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field. || { picto} + {Brand} + {Name}, e.g., <br>Main name: ⛽️ Shell VanPé (this name can be found on the brand's website) <br>Alternative: ⛽️ Shell Nandrain (locality name if different from the official name) || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer <br />
| {Brand} + {Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} + {MaxPower} + ({Amount}) || 3<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Transportation}} === <!--T:4--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Airport || You can replace "airport" in the name with the picto ✈, but the picto should be in front <br />
|{Name}, e.g.,<br />
: Brussels Airport<br />
: ✈ Brussels <br />
| 3<br />
|-<br />
| Bus Station || <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {Location} + {Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': <br />
:-in large cities:<br><br />
: {station name} + ({operator})<br />
:-outside large cities:<br />
: {city} + {station name} + ({operator})<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Ferry Pier || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Seaport / Marina / Harbor || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Subway Station || Underground Station for or Metro. Put the city name in front of the station name if different <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {City} + {Station Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Train Station || e.g., Station Antwerpen<br />
| <br />
*'''Fl?''': "Station" + {station name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
: alternate name:<br><br />
: "Station" + {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Bridge || Use only to represent a named road bridge with local or navigational significance || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Tunnel || || {Tunnel Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Taxi Station || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Junction / Interchange || || Junction {Name} || <br />
|- <br />
| Rest area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Carpool spot || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| <i>others / without sub category</i> || all other POIs belonging to transportation, and not to car services. Examples:<br> || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || Car Sharing & Bike Sharing Stations || {operator} + {station name} || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Professional and public}}=== <!--T:5--><br />
For public buildings or services such as fire departments, town halls and the like, we write the location after the name of the building or service, e.g., Stadhuis Antwerpen. For Organisations that have several locations, specify the location after a hyphen, after the general name of the organisation, e.g., UZ leuven - campus Gasthuisberg.<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Cemetery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| City Hall || local name use || {Building/Service} {Municipality} || <br />
|-<br />
| College / University || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Conventions / Event Center || || ||<br />
|- <br />
| Courthouse || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Doctor / Clinic || Use this category for non-urgent medical care. See for urgent medical care ''Hospital / Medical Care'' below || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Embassy / Consulate || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Emergency shelter || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Factory / industrial || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fire department || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Government || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Hospital / Urgent Care || Hospitals, First Aid Posts and other places that offer emergency aid. Use ''Doctor / Clinic'' for non-urgent medical care || || <br />
|-<br />
| Information point || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Kindergarten || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Library || || {City} {location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Military || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Offices || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Organization or Association || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Police Station || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Prison / Correctional Facility || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Post Office || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Religious Center | || || <br />
|-<br />
| School || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Trash & Recycling facility|| || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Shopping and services}}===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Arts and Crafts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| [[ATM Place|ATM]] || Use the translation for ATM, followed by the brand, e.g., "Geldautomaat SNS Bank" || ATM {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bank / Financial || || {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bookstore || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Dealership || In case there is a gas station, use ''Gas Station'' as the primary category unless they have different opening times || {Brand} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Car rental || Rental-car facilities and returns, including at airports, should be marked as a Point with the “Rental Car” Place category. If the return location is a normal Parking Lot, then mark it with the [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] category and the building with the Car Rental category<br />
|| ||<br />
|-<br />
| Convenience Store || like a kiosk || || <br />
|-<br />
| Currency Exchange || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Department Store || like De Bijenkorf? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Electronics || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fashion and Clothing || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Flowers || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Furniture / Home Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Gifts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Gym / Fitness || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hardware Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Jewelry || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Laundry / Dry Cleaning || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Market || || {City} {Location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Music Store || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Personal Care || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pet Store / Veterinarian || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pharmacy || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Photography || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Shopping Center || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sporting Goods || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Supermarket / Grocery || Delhaize. Intermarché, Lidl || {Brand} {Location} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swimming Pool || solely public swimming pools || || <br />
|-<br />
| Toy Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Travel Agency || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Food and Drink}} === <!--T:6--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bakery || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bar || Note: a "Plaza" is not a Place (in French) but a food court/food market. || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Coffee shop || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dessert || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fast Food || McDonald's may include drive-thru, then draw [[Parking Lot Road]] || || <br />
|-<br />
| Food Court || Can be used for a caterer or a wholesaler || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ice Cream || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Restaurant || || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Culture and Entertainment}} === <!--T:7--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Art Gallery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Casino || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Club || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Game Club || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Movie Theater || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Museum || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Music Venue || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Performing Arts Venue || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Racing Track || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Stadium / Arena || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Theme Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Theater || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Tourist Attraction / Historic Site || If the place functions as a landmark it may be represented as an Area Place || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Zoo / Aquarium || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Other}} === <!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Construction Site || Construction sites are not necessariliy mapped but it may be useful for editors checking roadworks under way. Ask your Country Manager in case of doubt || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || General category for all landmarks you can't find an existing suitable category for; add the missing category in front of the name || {missing category} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Lodging}} === <!--T:9--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bed & Breakfast || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Camping / Trailer Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Cottage / Cabin || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hostel || Used for Motels and Inns in the BeLux || F1 hotel Waalwijk ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hotel || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Outdoors}} === <!--T:10--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Beach || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Golf Course || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Park || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Playground || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Plaza || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pool || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Promenade || Probably not used in the BeLux || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Scenic Lookout / Viewpoint || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ski Area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Sports Court || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Natural features}} === <!--T:11--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Farm || Farmlands should <i>never</i> be mapped as areas. Editors should remove farmland areas immediately.?? || || <br />
|-<br />
| Forest / Grove || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Island || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| River / Stream || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? Features under approximately 20 meters wide will not be visible in the Waze app. Handy tool for drawing rivers: street to river || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sea / Lake / Pool || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Canal || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swamp / Marsh || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dam || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@| Missing Categories}} ==<br />
If you cannot find a suitable category, choose the most applicable category. You can add the missing category in front of the name in the alternate name field.<br><br />
Example: Butcher Sans Os<br><br />
*main Waze Category: ''Supermarket/Grocery''. <br />
* Primary name: "Sans Os". <br />
* alternate name: "butcher Sans Os"<br />
Note that when the name in itself is clear enough indicative for the kind of Place (ING, Décathlon, Carrefour, etc.) there is no need to put a category in front of the name. <br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! category !! style="width: 30%" | WME Category to use !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
|Community center || Conventions / Event center || primary: {Name}<br>alternate: {missing category} + {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|Village hall ||Conventions / Event center || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Dentist || Doctor / Clinic || || <br />
|-<br />
|Residential care centers || Personale Care || || <br />
|-<br />
|Butcher || Supermarket/Grocery || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@Tools}} ==<br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality Places,such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum].<br />
* <b>WME Split POI script</b> This script adds a button to the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] that allows you to split or cut Places from the category <i>Natural Features</i> into two, keeping the specifics. Can be used for all Natural Features like Island, Sea/Lake/Pool, River/Stream, Forest/Grove, Farm, Canal, Swamp / Marsh, Dam<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Description and discussion on the forum]<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Place_categories&diff=24633User:Moweez/Place categories2020-09-22T13:58:42Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Place categories}} <!--T:1--><br />
Waze has several major categories, which in turn includes quite a number of sub categories. If you choose a main category within WME, you automatically get to see the sub-categories to choose from. It is also possible to directly type in a category. <br />
<br />
The [[Places|Place]] categories used in Waze are not always directly applicable in BeLux, for they are global categories. At this time, it is not possible to adapt these categories to local customs. If you cannot find an applicable sub category, just use the main category and add the [[#Missing_Categories|missing category]] in front of the name in the alternate name field. <br />
<br />
This overview shows the categories used for the [[Places|Waze Places]]. For mapping guidelines, please read the page about [[User:Moweez/Places| Places]].<br />
<br />
Note that circumstances may require a different approach. The different regions use a different locking strategy (see table below). In any case, if a Place needs more protection, a higher lock level can be used.<br />
<br />
{{anchor|region}}<br />
==Regional differences==<br />
{| class="wikitable" border="0" bgcolor="#a7d2df"<br />
! colspan="5" width="99%" | Regional guidelines<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Flanders</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" |<b>Brussels</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Wallonia</b><br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Luxembourg</b><br />
|-<br />
<!--|Name <br />
| The use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] is discouraged<br />
| Use French as main name, Flemish as alternate name<br />
| preference for the use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] if available<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
|type <br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
|- --><br />
| lock <br />
| If a lock is required, the minimum lock level is described in the tables below.<br />
| Places may be locked at L3 or higher when considered completed. In any case, do not reduce the lock of complete POIs.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Categories==<br />
=== {{@|Parking Lot}} === <!--T:2--><br />
{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! || Parking {Name} || 2 <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Car Services}} === <!--T:3--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Always map as an Area of more than 500m<sup>2</sup>! <br><br> Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field. || { picto} + {Brand} + {Name}, e.g., <br>Main name: ⛽️ Shell VanPé (this name can be found on the brand's website) <br>Alternative: ⛽️ Shell Nandrain (locality name if different from the official name) || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer <br />
| {Brand} + {Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} + {MaxPower} + ({Amount}) || 3<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Transportation}} === <!--T:4--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Airport || You can replace "airport" in the name with the picto ✈, but the picto should be in front <br />
|{Name}, e.g.,<br />
: Brussels Airport<br />
: ✈ Brussels <br />
| 3<br />
|-<br />
| Bus Station || <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {Location} + {Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': <br />
:-in large cities:<br><br />
: {station name} + ({operator})<br />
:-outside large cities:<br />
: {city} + {station name} + ({operator})<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Ferry Pier || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Seaport / Marina / Harbor || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Subway Station || Underground Station for or Metro. Put the city name in front of the station name if different <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {City} + {Station Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Train Station || e.g., Station Antwerpen<br />
| <br />
*'''Fl?''': "Station" + {station name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
: alternate name:<br><br />
: "Station" + {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Bridge || Use only to represent a named road bridge with local or navigational significance || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Tunnel || || {Tunnel Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Taxi Station || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Junction / Interchange || || Junction {Name} || <br />
|- <br />
| Rest area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Carpool spot || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| <i>others / without sub category</i> || all other POIs belonging to transportation, and not to car services. Examples:<br> || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || Car Sharing & Bike Sharing Stations || {operator} + {station name} || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Professional and public}}=== <!--T:5--><br />
For public buildings or services such as fire departments, town halls and the like, we write the location after the name of the building or service, e.g., Stadhuis Antwerpen. For Organisations that have several locations, specify the location after a hyphen, after the general name of the organisation, e.g., UZ leuven - campus Gasthuisberg.<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Cemetery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| City Hall || local name use || {Building/Service} {Municipality} || <br />
|-<br />
| College / University || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Conventions / Event Center || || ||<br />
|- <br />
| Courthouse || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Doctor / Clinic || Use this category for non-urgent medical care. See for urgent medical care ''Hospital / Medical Care'' below || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Embassy / Consulate || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Emergency shelter || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Factory / industrial || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fire department || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Government || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Hospital / Urgent Care || Hospitals, First Aid Posts and other places that offer emergency aid. Use ''Doctor / Clinic'' for non-urgent medical care || || <br />
|-<br />
| Information point || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Kindergarten || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Library || || {City} {location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Military || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Offices || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Organization or Association || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Police Station || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Prison / Correctional Facility || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Post Office || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Religious Center | || || <br />
|-<br />
| School || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Trash & Recycling facility|| || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Shopping and services}}===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Arts and Crafts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| [[ATM Place|ATM]] || Use the translation for ATM, followed by the brand, e.g., "Geldautomaat SNS Bank" || ATM {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bank / Financial || || {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bookstore || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Dealership || In case there is a gas station, use ''Gas Station'' as the primary category unless they have different opening times || {Brand} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Car rental || Rental-car facilities and returns, including at airports, should be marked as a Point with the “Rental Car” Place category. If the return location is a normal Parking Lot, then mark it with the [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] category and the building with the Car Rental category<br />
|| ||<br />
|-<br />
| Convenience Store || like a kiosk || || <br />
|-<br />
| Currency Exchange || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Department Store || like De Bijenkorf? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Electronics || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fashion and Clothing || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Flowers || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Furniture / Home Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Gifts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Gym / Fitness || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hardware Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Jewelry || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Laundry / Dry Cleaning || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Market || || {City} {Location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Music Store || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Personal Care || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pet Store / Veterinarian || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pharmacy || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Photography || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Shopping Center || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sporting Goods || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Supermarket / Grocery || Delhaize. Intermarché, Lidl || {Brand} {Location} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swimming Pool || solely public swimming pools || || <br />
|-<br />
| Toy Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Travel Agency || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Food and Drink}} === <!--T:6--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bakery || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bar || Note: a "Plaza" is not a Place (in French) but a food court/food market. || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Coffee shop || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dessert || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fast Food || McDonald's may include drive-thru, then draw [[Parking Lot Road]] || || <br />
|-<br />
| Food Court || Can be used for a caterer or a wholesaler || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ice Cream || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Restaurant || || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Culture and Entertainment}} === <!--T:7--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Art Gallery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Casino || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Club || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Game Club || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Movie Theater || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Museum || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Music Venue || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Performing Arts Venue || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Racing Track || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Stadium / Arena || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Theme Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Theater || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Tourist Attraction / Historic Site || If the place functions as a landmark it may be represented as an Area Place || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Zoo / Aquarium || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Other}} === <!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Construction Site || Construction sites are not necessariliy mapped but it may be useful for editors checking roadworks under way. Ask your Country Manager in case of doubt || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || General category for all landmarks you can't find an existing suitable category for; add the missing category in front of the name || {missing category} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Lodging}} === <!--T:9--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bed & Breakfast || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Camping / Trailer Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Cottage / Cabin || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hostel || Used for Motels and Inns in the BeLux || F1 hotel Waalwijk ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hotel || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Outdoors}} === <!--T:10--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Beach || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Golf Course || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Park || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Playground || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Plaza || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pool || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Promenade || Probably not used in the BeLux || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Scenic Lookout / Viewpoint || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ski Area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Sports Court || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@Natural features}} === <!--T:11--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Farm || Farmlands should <i>never</i> be mapped as areas. Editors should remove farmland areas immediately.?? || || <br />
|-<br />
| Forest / Grove || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Island || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| River / Stream || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? Features under approximately 20 meters wide will not be visible in the Waze app. Handy tool for drawing rivers: street to river || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sea / Lake / Pool || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Canal || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swamp / Marsh || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dam || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@| Missing Categories}} ==<br />
If you cannot find a suitable category, choose the most applicable category. You can add the missing category in front of the name in the alternate name field.<br><br />
Example: Butcher Sans Os<br><br />
*main Waze Category: ''Supermarket/Grocery''. <br />
* Primary name: "Sans Os". <br />
* alternate name: "butcher Sans Os"<br />
Note that when the name in itself is clear enough indicative for the kind of Place (ING, Décathlon, Carrefour, etc.) there is no need to put a category in front of the name. <br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! category !! style="width: 30%" | WME Category to use !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
|Community center || Conventions / Event center || primary: {Name}<br>alternate: {missing category} + {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|Village hall ||Conventions / Event center || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Dentist || Doctor / Clinic || || <br />
|-<br />
|Residential care centers || Personale Care || || <br />
|-<br />
|Butcher || Supermarket/Grocery || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@Tools}} ==<br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality Places,such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum].<br />
* <b>WME Split POI script</b> This script adds a button to the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] that allows you to split or cut Places from the category <i>Natural Features</i> into two, keeping the specifics. Can be used for all Natural Features like Island, Sea/Lake/Pool, River/Stream, Forest/Grove, Farm, Canal, Swamp / Marsh, Dam<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Description and discussion on the forum]<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Place_categories&diff=24632User:Moweez/Place categories2020-09-22T13:54:29Z<p>Moweez: consistency edits</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Place categories}} <!--T:1--><br />
Waze has several major categories, which in turn includes quite a number of sub categories. If you choose a main category within WME, you automatically get to see the sub-categories to choose from. It is also possible to directly type in a category. <br />
<br />
The [[Places|Place]] categories used in Waze are not always directly applicable in BeLux, for they are global categories. At this time, it is not possible to adapt these categories to local customs. If you cannot find an applicable sub category, just use the main category and add the [[#Missing_Categories|missing category]] in front of the name in the alternate name field. <br />
<br />
This overview shows the categories used for the [[Places|Waze Places]]. For mapping guidelines, please read the page about [[User:Moweez/Places| Places]].<br />
<br />
Note that circumstances may require a different approach. The different regions use a different locking strategy (see table below). In any case, if a Place needs more protection, a higher lock level can be used.<br />
<br />
{{anchor|region}}<br />
==Regional differences==<br />
{| class="wikitable" border="0" bgcolor="#a7d2df"<br />
! colspan="5" width="99%" | Regional guidelines<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Flanders</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" |<b>Brussels</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Wallonia</b><br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Luxembourg</b><br />
|-<br />
<!--|Name <br />
| The use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] is discouraged<br />
| Use French as main name, Flemish as alternate name<br />
| preference for the use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] if available<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
|type <br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
|- --><br />
| lock <br />
| If a lock is required, the minimum lock level is described in the tables below.<br />
| Places may be locked at L3 or higher when considered completed. In any case, do not reduce the lock of complete POIs.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Categories==<br />
=== {{@|Parking Lot}}=== <!--T:2--><br />
{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! || Parking {Name} || 2 <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Car Services}} === <!--T:3--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Always map as an Area of more than 500m<sup>2</sup>! <br><br> Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field. || { picto} + {Brand} + {Name}, e.g., <br>Main name: ⛽️ Shell VanPé (this name can be found on the brand's website) <br>Alternative: ⛽️ Shell Nandrain (locality name if different from the official name) || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer <br />
| {Brand} + {Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} + {MaxPower} + ({Amount}) || 3<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Transportation}} === <!--T:4--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Airport || You can replace "airport" in the name with the picto ✈, but the picto should be in front <br />
|{Name}, e.g.,<br />
: Brussels Airport<br />
: ✈ Brussels <br />
| 3<br />
|-<br />
| Bus Station || <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {Location} + {Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': <br />
:-in large cities:<br><br />
: {station name} + ({operator})<br />
:-outside large cities:<br />
: {city} + {station name} + ({operator})<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Ferry Pier || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Seaport / Marina / Harbor || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Subway Station || Underground Station for or Metro. Put the city name in front of the station name if different <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {City} + {Station Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Train Station || e.g., Station Antwerpen<br />
| <br />
*'''Fl?''': "Station" + {station name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
: alternate name:<br><br />
: "Station" + {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Bridge || Use only to represent a named road bridge with local or navigational significance || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Tunnel || || {Tunnel Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Taxi Station || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Junction / Interchange || || Junction {Name} || <br />
|- <br />
| Rest area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Carpool spot || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| <i>others / without sub category</i> || all other POIs belonging to transportation, and not to car services. Examples:<br> || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || Car Sharing & Bike Sharing Stations || {operator} + {station name} || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Professional and public=== <!--T:5--><br />
For public buildings or services such as fire departments, town halls and the like, we write the location after the name of the building or service, e.g., Stadhuis Antwerpen. For Organisations that have several locations, specify the location after a hyphen, after the general name of the organisation, e.g., UZ leuven - campus Gasthuisberg.<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Cemetery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| City Hall || local name use || {Building/Service} {Municipality} || <br />
|-<br />
| College / University || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Conventions / Event Center || || ||<br />
|- <br />
| Courthouse || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Doctor / Clinic || Use this category for non-urgent medical care. See for urgent medical care ''Hospital / Medical Care'' below || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Embassy / Consulate || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Emergency shelter || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Factory / industrial || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fire department || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Government || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Hospital / Urgent Care || Hospitals, First Aid Posts and other places that offer emergency aid. Use ''Doctor / Clinic'' for non-urgent medical care || || <br />
|-<br />
| Information point || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Kindergarten || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Library || || {City} {location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Military || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Offices || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Organization or Association || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Police Station || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Prison / Correctional Facility || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Post Office || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Religious Center | || || <br />
|-<br />
| School || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Trash & Recycling facility|| || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Shopping and services===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Arts and Crafts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| [[ATM Place|ATM]] || Use the translation for ATM, followed by the brand, e.g., "Geldautomaat SNS Bank" || ATM {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bank / Financial || || {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bookstore || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Dealership || In case there is a gas station, use ''Gas Station'' as the primary category unless they have different opening times || {Brand} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Car rental || Rental-car facilities and returns, including at airports, should be marked as a Point with the “Rental Car” Place category. If the return location is a normal Parking Lot, then mark it with the [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] category and the building with the Car Rental category<br />
|| ||<br />
|-<br />
| Convenience Store || like a kiosk || || <br />
|-<br />
| Currency Exchange || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Department Store || like De Bijenkorf? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Electronics || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fashion and Clothing || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Flowers || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Furniture / Home Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Gifts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Gym / Fitness || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hardware Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Jewelry || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Laundry / Dry Cleaning || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Market || || {City} {Location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Music Store || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Personal Care || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pet Store / Veterinarian || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pharmacy || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Photography || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Shopping Center || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sporting Goods || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Supermarket / Grocery || Delhaize. Intermarché, Lidl || {Brand} {Location} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swimming Pool || solely public swimming pools || || <br />
|-<br />
| Toy Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Travel Agency || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Food and Drink=== <!--T:6--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bakery || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bar || Note: a "Plaza" is not a Place (in French) but a food court/food market. || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Coffee shop || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dessert || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fast Food || McDonald's may include drive-thru, then draw [[Parking Lot Road]] || || <br />
|-<br />
| Food Court || Can be used for a caterer or a wholesaler || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ice Cream || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Restaurant || || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Culture and Entertainment=== <!--T:7--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Art Gallery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Casino || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Club || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Game Club || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Movie Theater || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Museum || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Music Venue || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Performing Arts Venue || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Racing Track || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Stadium / Arena || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Theme Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Theater || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Tourist Attraction / Historic Site || If the place functions as a landmark it may be represented as an Area Place || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Zoo / Aquarium || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Other=== <!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Construction Site || Construction sites are not necessariliy mapped but it may be useful for editors checking roadworks under way. Ask your Country Manager in case of doubt || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || General category for all landmarks you can't find an existing suitable category for; add the missing category in front of the name || {missing category} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Lodging=== <!--T:9--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Bed & Breakfast || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Camping / Trailer Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Cottage / Cabin || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hostel || Used for Motels and Inns in the BeLux || F1 hotel Waalwijk ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hotel || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Outdoors=== <!--T:10--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Beach || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Golf Course || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Park || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Playground || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Plaza || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pool || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Promenade || Probably not used in the BeLux || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Scenic Lookout / Viewpoint || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ski Area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Sports Court || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Natural features=== <!--T:11--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| Farm || Farmlands should <i>never</i> be mapped as areas. Editors should remove farmland areas immediately.?? || || <br />
|-<br />
| Forest / Grove || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Island || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| River / Stream || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? Features under approximately 20 meters wide will not be visible in the Waze app. Handy tool for drawing rivers: street to river || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sea / Lake / Pool || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Canal || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swamp / Marsh || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dam || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
== {{@| Missing Categories}} ==<br />
If you cannot find a suitable category, choose the most applicable category. You can add the missing category in front of the name in the alternate name field.<br><br />
Example: Butcher Sans Os<br><br />
*main Waze Category: ''Supermarket/Grocery''. <br />
* Primary name: "Sans Os". <br />
* alternate name: "butcher Sans Os"<br />
Note that when the name in itself is clear enough indicative for the kind of Place (ING, Décathlon, Carrefour, etc.) there is no need to put a category in front of the name. <br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! category !! style="width: 30%" | WME Category to use !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
|Community center || Conventions / Event center || primary: {Name}<br>alternate: {missing category} + {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|Village hall ||Conventions / Event center || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Dentist || Doctor / Clinic || || <br />
|-<br />
|Residential care centers || Personale Care || || <br />
|-<br />
|Butcher || Supermarket/Grocery || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality Places,such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum].<br />
* <b>WME Split POI script</b> This script adds a button to the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] that allows you to split or cut Places from the category <i>Natural Features</i> into two, keeping the specifics. Can be used for all Natural Features like Island, Sea/Lake/Pool, River/Stream, Forest/Grove, Farm, Canal, Swamp / Marsh, Dam<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Description and discussion on the forum]<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Camera&diff=24618Camera2020-09-22T13:35:36Z<p>Moweez: Marked this version for translation</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<!--T:10--><br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's== <!--T:5--><br />
===Speed camera===<br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The excess speed should be set with the speed limit on the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
<br />
=====Combined cameras===== <!--T:11--><br />
:In Belgium, all red light camera's also measure speed. They are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
:*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
<br />
=====Red Light Only===== <!--T:12--><br />
:*Leave the excess speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
<!--T:13--><br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras === <!--T:14--><br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
==Mapping guidelines== <!--T:15--><br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same lock level from the road segment)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Camera&diff=24617Camera2020-09-22T13:32:47Z<p>Moweez: updated according to proposal page</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The excess speed should be set with the speed limit on the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
<br />
=====Combined cameras=====<br />
:In Belgium, all red light camera's also measure speed. They are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
:*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
<br />
=====Red Light Only=====<br />
:*Leave the excess speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same lock level from the road segment)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24574User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-25T11:23:23Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The excess speed should be set with the speed limit on the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*Leave the excess speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, see combined camera.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
In Belgium, all red light camera's also measure speed. They are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Speed_limit&diff=24573User:Moweez/Speed limit2020-08-24T18:56:44Z<p>Moweez: /* Average Speed Limit */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Speed Limits}}<br />
We can attribute a Speed Limit (SL) to segments in WME. We can specify a unique value for each driving direction, and they will show in the app. Default SLs as given in the table below are applicable when there are no other signs present.<br />
<br />
<!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|+style="text-align: left;" | <big>Default speed limits (Last update June 2020)</big><br />
! <br />
! colspan="4"| <b>Region</b><br />
|-<br />
! !! Flanders !! Brussels !! Wallonia !! Luxembourg<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic sign-urban area-f1b H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]]* || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic_sign-end_of_urban_area-f3b_H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-70.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Bord-F5-BE.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-130.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| || || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki>As of 1/1/2021, the default speed limit will be 30 km/h in Brussels' urban areas.<br />
<br />
==Mapping Guidelines==<br />
* Adding SLs must be based on certainties. You should be familiar with the area where you add them. Please do not enter SLs when you are not 100% sure.<br />
* Make sure you’re using the correct units for SLs! You can switch between Imperial and Metric by clicking on the tab with the ‘Gear’ icon in the left menu. The Gear icon is only visible when no segment or place is selected.<br />
* Speed limits like [[File:Be_Bord-30.jpg|20px]] are valid up to the next speed limit sign, or next junction (BE only). If no speed limit sign is visible, the SL in Belgium after next junction will be the default again. In Luxembourg, the given speed limit from the last sign still counts. Only speed limit signs with the word "zone" on it are valid for all the streets within the indicated area (see the paragraph below)<br />
* In some cases it may be required to split segments to be able to enter the correct SL. If the change of speed is near to a junction, it might be better not to create an extra segment. Keep the length of segments to at least 20 meters.<br />
<br />
==Special Cases==<br />
===Areas with a lowered speed limit=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Bord-zone-30.png|right|60px]]<br />
In a zone with a <i>lowered speed limit</i>, the speed limit is valid for a clear demarcated area. In Belgium, a <i>school zone</i> is such a special area, with a speed limit of 30 km/h. These zones can be announced by a permanent/static, or by a dynamic/electronic 'zone 30' sign. In both cases, the SL must be entered as 30 km/h, if no other signs overrule them. Other zones are [[Road_types#Restricted_roads|residential areas and bicycle streets]]. <br />
<!--Mo: should school zone be entered to https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/Road_types#Restricted_roads as well?--><br />
<br />
===Variable speed limit=== <!--T:3--><br />
[[File:be_Matrixbord.png|300px|left]]<br />
The set SL might be overruled in real life by other signs, including dynamic signs. However, at the moment, there is no possibility to enter dynamic speed limits. Therefore, enter the SL as if no variable sign is present. We assume people will stIll watch the road and consider the signs while driving.<!--Mo: WHAT ABOUT TIME BASED SPEED LIMITS?-->{{clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Check Zone===<br />
If there is a stretch where the average speed is checked, the segments belonging to the stretch need to have the speed limit specified, as well as the average speed camera box checked. See [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average Speed Camera]] for more details.(or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Wme-speed-helper.png|right|thumb|270px|Speedhelper script]]<br />
<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Speedhelper</b> helps speedup the input of speed limits. <br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13774-wme-speedhelper Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=166746&start=390&hilit=WME+Speedhelper Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Route Speeds</b> script to display the average speed and routing time over one or more segments, on different days and times<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/369630-wme-route-speeds-mapomatic-fork Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=105839&p=1781587&hilit=select#p1781587 Description and discusion on forum]<br />
</translate><br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]] [[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Speed_limit&diff=24572User:Moweez/Speed limit2020-08-24T18:54:24Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Speed Limits}}<br />
We can attribute a Speed Limit (SL) to segments in WME. We can specify a unique value for each driving direction, and they will show in the app. Default SLs as given in the table below are applicable when there are no other signs present.<br />
<br />
<!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|+style="text-align: left;" | <big>Default speed limits (Last update June 2020)</big><br />
! <br />
! colspan="4"| <b>Region</b><br />
|-<br />
! !! Flanders !! Brussels !! Wallonia !! Luxembourg<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic sign-urban area-f1b H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]]* || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic_sign-end_of_urban_area-f3b_H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-70.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Bord-F5-BE.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-130.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| || || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki>As of 1/1/2021, the default speed limit will be 30 km/h in Brussels' urban areas.<br />
<br />
==Mapping Guidelines==<br />
* Adding SLs must be based on certainties. You should be familiar with the area where you add them. Please do not enter SLs when you are not 100% sure.<br />
* Make sure you’re using the correct units for SLs! You can switch between Imperial and Metric by clicking on the tab with the ‘Gear’ icon in the left menu. The Gear icon is only visible when no segment or place is selected.<br />
* Speed limits like [[File:Be_Bord-30.jpg|20px]] are valid up to the next speed limit sign, or next junction (BE only). If no speed limit sign is visible, the SL in Belgium after next junction will be the default again. In Luxembourg, the given speed limit from the last sign still counts. Only speed limit signs with the word "zone" on it are valid for all the streets within the indicated area (see the paragraph below)<br />
* In some cases it may be required to split segments to be able to enter the correct SL. If the change of speed is near to a junction, it might be better not to create an extra segment. Keep the length of segments to at least 20 meters.<br />
<br />
==Special Cases==<br />
===Areas with a lowered speed limit=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Bord-zone-30.png|right|60px]]<br />
In a zone with a <i>lowered speed limit</i>, the speed limit is valid for a clear demarcated area. In Belgium, a <i>school zone</i> is such a special area, with a speed limit of 30 km/h. These zones can be announced by a permanent/static, or by a dynamic/electronic 'zone 30' sign. In both cases, the SL must be entered as 30 km/h, if no other signs overrule them. Other zones are [[Road_types#Restricted_roads|residential areas and bicycle streets]]. <br />
<!--Mo: should school zone be entered to https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/Road_types#Restricted_roads as well?--><br />
<br />
===Variable speed limit=== <!--T:3--><br />
[[File:be_Matrixbord.png|300px|left]]<br />
The set SL might be overruled in real life by other signs, including dynamic signs. However, at the moment, there is no possibility to enter dynamic speed limits. Therefore, enter the SL as if no variable sign is present. We assume people will stIll watch the road and consider the signs while driving.<!--Mo: WHAT ABOUT TIME BASED SPEED LIMITS?-->{{clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Limit===<br />
If there is a stretch where the average speed limit is checked, the segments belonging to the stretch need to have the speed limit specified, as well as the average speed camera checked. See [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average Speed Camera]] for more details.(or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Wme-speed-helper.png|right|thumb|270px|Speedhelper script]]<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Speedhelper</b> helps speedup the input of speed limits. <br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13774-wme-speedhelper Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=166746&start=390&hilit=WME+Speedhelper Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Route Speeds</b> script to display the average speed and routing time over one or more segments, on different days and times<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/369630-wme-route-speeds-mapomatic-fork Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=105839&p=1781587&hilit=select#p1781587 Description and discusion on forum]<br />
</translate><br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]] [[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24571User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:45:49Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The excess speed should be set with the speed limit on the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the excess speed to the speed limit on the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the excess speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24570User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:45:10Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The excess speed should be set with the speed limit on the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the maximum speed to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24569User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:44:14Z<p>Moweez: /* Mapping guidelines */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the maximum speed to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The excess speed is set to the Speed Limit on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24568User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:41:30Z<p>Moweez: /* Mapping guidelines */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the maximum speed to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The speed limit is set to the Speed Limit of the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24567User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:39:53Z<p>Moweez: /* Mapping guidelines */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the maximum speed to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can <b>add a new camera</b> from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and <b>choose the type</b> in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The speed limit is set to 0 for Red Light camera's; for Speed camera's, it is the same as the Speed Limit set on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24566User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:38:31Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the maximum speed to the speed limit for the road which the camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored.<br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can add a new camera from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and choose the type in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The speed limit is set to 0 for Red Light camera's; for Speed camera's, it is the same as the Speed Limit set on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24565User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:36:54Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring.<br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the Speed setting to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored. <br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can add a new camera from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and choose the type in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The speed limit is set to 0 for Red Light camera's; for Speed camera's, it is the same as the Speed Limit set on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Camera&diff=24564User:Moweez/Camera2020-08-24T18:01:55Z<p>Moweez: corrected speed limit for red light cams; removed unvalidated camera's</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Camera's}}<!--T:1--><br />
[[File:Cameras-example.png|right|360px]]<br />
Before adding any cameras to the Waze map, you must be sure you are accurately reporting a camera installation. Many devices may have similar appearances, but very different functions.<br />
* The "30" on the speed cam icon is just part of the image and is not an indication of the actual speed limit the camera is set to.<br />
* The current camera image in the app as well as in WME implies that the camera captures the traffic from behind. Don't be fooled. It may also catch you up front<br />
*It is not possible to define a camera in such a way that it differentiates between traffic going straight or taking a turn at a junction. <br />
* The Waze app warns about a camera if it is valid, points in the same direction as the road segment, and the driver is exceeding the limit set on the camera<br />
{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<br><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Types of Camera's==<br />
===Speed camera=== <!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Camera2true.png|right]]<br />
Used for permanently mounted cameras that monitor violations of [[Speed limit|maximum speeds]]. They show in WME with a speed limit sign of "30" attached to the camera icon.<br />
*Speed Cameras should be placed at the location of the camera itself. <br />
*The Speed camera should be set with the maximum speed limit for the road which it is monitoring. <br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored. Zero is not blank; a max speed of zero will cause the camera to always generate an audible alert. <br />
<br />
===Red Light camera=== <!--T:6--><br />
[[File:Camera4true.png|right]]<br />
Permanently mounted cameras monitor for red light violations and optionally for violations of maximum speeds. They show with a icon with a red and green light.<br />
*Red Light cameras should be placed at the stop bar they are monitoring. <br />
*If the Red Light camera also measures speed, set the Speed setting to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
*Leave the max speed field blank if speed is not monitored. <br />
<br />
===Combined cameras===<br />
*Camera's that are monitoring both speed and red light violations are mapped with a Red Light camera. There is no need to add a separate Speed camera. <br />
*the maximum speed is set to the speed limit for the road which the speed camera is monitoring.<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===False camera=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Camera3true.png|right]]<br />
Sometimes a fake device is placed. These dummy cameras can be added to prevent people from reporting these dummies as actual cameras. <br />
<br />
In the [[Waze app|app]] a dummy camera looks like [[File:Dummy-camera-app.png|35px]]<br />
{{Clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average speed cameras ===<br />
Average speed cameras (ASC) measure speed over a certain distance. They are not mapped like the above cameras. Use the [[Road Aspects|Average speed camera checkboxes]] on the road segments where the average speed is checked. (or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:2--><br />
==Mapping guidelines==<br />
*You can add a new camera from the [[File:DrawRoads.jpg]] menu at the top bar of the [[Waze Map Editor|Map Editor]] <br />
*Select the camera and choose the type in the left menu<br />
*<b>Location</b>: Cameras should be placed over the roadway they are monitoring. The exact location depends on the type of camera (see above).<br />
*<b>Shutter Direction</b>: When the camera icon is selected in the Map Editor, <b>the red dot should point in the direction of travel</b>. It does not matter if the real-life camera will take a picture from the back of a car after passing, or from the front before passing the camera.<br />
*Place the correct quantity of cameras. You need one Camera per monitored direction. So if you have a 4-way intersection with 1 real life camera watching every direction, you need 4 cameras in Waze. <br />
*<b>Speed</b>: The speed limit is set to 0 for Red Light camera's; for Speed camera's, it is the same as the Speed Limit set on the road it is monitoring.<br />
*<b>Lock</b>: Camera's are locked to a minimum level 3 (or higher to the same level as the road segment?)<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24563User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T19:31:35Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[{{PAGENAME:Restrictions{{#translation:}}}}]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being.<br />
<!--<br />
Or short explanation here and link to :<br />
Read more about [[Speed Limit#Average Speed Limit|average speed limit]]--><br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. If you need to edit a road above your editing level, ask an unlock. Read more at [[{{PAGENAME:Locks{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
Clicking this box will select all segments with the same street (and city) name. Shortkey {{key press|Ctrl|A}}<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
To enter or change [[{{PAGENAME:House numbers{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
The ID of the segment is important. For example, it is part of a permalink when you include a segment. When you make changes to a segment such as splitting it, or changing the driving direction, the ID might change and traffic info can be lost. Also, after changing the ID, you can not set a closure until after the next map update.<br />
<br />
===View History===<br />
In the history you see some global info about the last changes. Also recent closures are listed here.<br />
<!--More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]--><br />
<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24562User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T19:04:53Z<p>Moweez: /* Edit housenumbers */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
To enter or change [[{{PAGENAME:House numbers{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
The ID of the segment is important. For example, it is part of a permalink when you include a segment. When you make changes to a segment such as splitting it, or changing the driving direction, the ID might change and traffic info can be lost. Also, after changing the ID, you can not set a closure until after the next map update.<br />
<br />
===View History===<br />
In the history you see some global info about the last changes. Also recent closures are listed here.<br />
<!--More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]--><br />
<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Speed_limit&diff=24561User:Moweez/Speed limit2020-08-23T18:59:10Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Speed Limits}}<br />
We can attribute a Speed Limit (SL) to segments in WME. We can specify a unique value for each driving direction, and they will show in the app. Default SLs as given in the table below are applicable when there are no other signs present.<br />
<br />
<!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|+style="text-align: left;" | <big>Default speed limits (Last update June 2020)</big><br />
! <br />
! colspan="4"| <b>Region</b><br />
|-<br />
! !! Flanders !! Brussels !! Wallonia !! Luxembourg<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic sign-urban area-f1b H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]]* || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic_sign-end_of_urban_area-f3b_H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-70.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Bord-F5-BE.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-130.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| || || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki>As of 1/1/2021, the default speed limit will be 30 km/h in Brussels' urban areas.<br />
<br />
==Mapping Guidelines==<br />
* Adding SLs must be based on certainties. You should be familiar with the area where you add them. Please do not enter SLs when you are not 100% sure.<br />
* Make sure you’re using the correct units for SLs! You can switch between Imperial and Metric by clicking on the tab with the ‘Gear’ icon in the left menu. The Gear icon is only visible when no segment or place is selected.<br />
* Speed limits like [[File:Be_Bord-30.jpg|20px]] are valid up to the next speed limit sign, or next junction (BE only). If no speed limit sign is visible, the SL in Belgium after next junction will be the default again. In Luxembourg, the given speed limit from the last sign still counts. Only speed limit signs with the word "zone" on it are valid for all the streets within the indicated area (see the paragraph below)<br />
* In some cases it may be required to split segments to be able to enter the correct SL. If the change of speed is near to a junction, it might be better not to create an extra segment. Keep the length of segments to at least 20 meters.<br />
<br />
==Special Cases==<br />
===Areas with a lowered speed limit=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Bord-zone-30.png|right|60px]]<br />
In a zone with a <i>lowered speed limit</i>, the speed limit is valid for a clear demarcated area. In Belgium, a <i>school zone</i> is such a special area, with a speed limit of 30 km/h. These zones can be announced by a permanent/static, or by a dynamic/electronic 'zone 30' sign. In both cases, the SL must be entered as 30 km/h, if no other signs overrule them. Other zones are [[Road_types#Restricted_roads|residential areas and bicycle streets]]. <br />
<!--Mo: should school zone be entered to https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/Road_types#Restricted_roads as well?--><br />
<br />
===Variable speed limit=== <!--T:3--><br />
[[File:be_Matrixbord.png|300px|left]]<br />
The set SL might be overruled in real life by other signs, including dynamic signs. However, at the moment, there is no possibility to enter dynamic speed limits. Therefore, enter the SL as if no variable sign is present. We assume people will stIll watch the road and consider the signs while driving.<!--Mo: WHAT ABOUT TIME BASED SPEED LIMITS?-->{{clear}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Limit===<br />
If there is a stretch where the average speed limit is checked, the segments belonging to the stretch need to have the speed limit specified, as well as the average speed camera checked. See [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average Speed Camera]] for more details.(or explain here?)<br />
<br />
<!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Wme-speed-helper.png|right|thumb|270px|Speedhelper script]]<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Speedhelper</b> helps speedup the input of speed limits. <br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13774-wme-speedhelper Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=166746&start=390&hilit=WME+Speedhelper Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Route Speeds</b> script to display the average speed and routing time over one or more segments, on different days and times<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/369630-wme-route-speeds-mapomatic-fork Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=105839&p=1781587&hilit=select#p1781587 Description and discusion on forum]<br />
</translate><br />
__NOTOC__<br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]] [[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Speed_limit&diff=24560User:Moweez/Speed limit2020-08-23T18:36:13Z<p>Moweez: /* Average Speed Limit */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Speed Limits}}<br />
We can attribute a Speed Limit (SL) to segments in WME. We can specify a unique value for each driving direction, and they will show in the app. Default SLs as given in the table below are applicable when there are no other signs present.<br />
<br />
<!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|+style="text-align: left;" | <big>Default speed limits (Last update June 2020)</big><br />
! <br />
! colspan="4"| <b>Region</b><br />
|-<br />
! !! Flanders !! Brussels !! Wallonia !! Luxembourg<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic sign-urban area-f1b H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]]* || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic_sign-end_of_urban_area-f3b_H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-70.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Bord-F5-BE.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-130.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| || || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki>As of 1/1/2021, the default speed limit will be 30 km/h in Brussels' urban areas.<br />
<br />
==Mapping Guidelines==<br />
* Adding SLs must be based on certainties. You should be familiar with the area where you add them. Please do not enter SLs when you are not 100% sure.<br />
* Make sure you’re using the correct units for SLs! You can switch between Imperial and Metric by clicking on the tab with the ‘Gear’ icon in the left menu. The Gear icon is only visible when no segment or place is selected.<br />
* Speed limits like [[File:Be_Bord-30.jpg|20px]] are valid up to the next speed limit sign, or next junction (BE only). If no speed limit sign is visible, the SL in Belgium after next junction will be the default again. In Luxembourg, the given speed limit from the last sign still counts. Only speed limit signs with the word "zone" on it are valid for all the streets within the indicated area (see the paragraph below)<br />
* In some cases it may be required to split segments to be able to enter the correct SL. If the change of speed is near to a junction, it might be better not to create an extra segment. Keep the length of segments to at least 20 meters.<br />
<br />
==Special Cases==<br />
===Areas with a lowered speed limit=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Bord-zone-30.png|right|60px]]<br />
In a zone with a <i>lowered speed limit</i>, the speed limit is valid for a clear demarcated area. In Belgium, a <i>school zone</i> is such a special area, with a speed limit of 30 km/h. These zones can be announced by a permanent/static, or by a dynamic/electronic 'zone 30' sign. In both cases, the SL must be entered as 30 km/h, if no other signs overrule them. Other zones are [[Road_types#Restricted_roads|residential areas and bicycle streets]]. <br />
<!--Mo: should school zone be entered to https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/Road_types#Restricted_roads as well?--><br />
<br />
===Average Speed Limit===<br />
If there is a stretch where the average speed limit is checked, the segments belonging to the stretch need to have the speed limit specified, as well as the average speed camera checked. See [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average Speed Camera]] for more details.(or explain here?)<br />
<br />
===Variable speed limit=== <!--T:3--><br />
[[File:be_Matrixbord.png|300px|left]]<br />
The set SL might be overruled in real life by other signs, including dynamic signs. However, at the moment, there is no possibility to enter dynamic speed limits. Therefore, enter the SL as if no variable sign is present. We assume people will stIll watch the road and consider the signs while driving.<!--Mo: WHAT ABOUT TIME BASED SPEED LIMITS?-->{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Wme-speed-helper.png|right|thumb|270px|Speedhelper script]]<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Speedhelper</b> helps speedup the input of speed limits. <br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13774-wme-speedhelper Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=166746&start=390&hilit=WME+Speedhelper Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Route Speeds</b> script to display the average speed and routing time over one or more segments, on different days and times<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/369630-wme-route-speeds-mapomatic-fork Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=105839&p=1781587&hilit=select#p1781587 Description and discusion on forum]<br />
</translate><br />
__NOTOC__<br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]] [[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24556User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T17:29:30Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
The ID of the segment is important. For example, it is part of a permalink when you include a segment. When you make changes to a segment such as splitting it, or changing the driving direction, the ID might change and traffic info can be lost. Also, after changing the ID, you can not set a closure until after the next map update.<br />
<br />
===View History===<br />
In the history you see some global info about the last changes. Also recent closures are listed here.<br />
<!--More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]--><br />
<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24555User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T17:28:31Z<p>Moweez: /* View History */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
The ID of the segment is important. For example, it is part of a permalink when you include a segment. When you make changes to a segment such as splitting it, or changing the driving direction, the ID might change and traffic info can be lost. Also, after changing the ID, you can not set a closure until after the next map update.<br />
<br />
===View History===<br />
In the history you see some global info about the last changes. Also recent closures are listed here.<br />
<br />
<!--More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24554User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T17:26:54Z<p>Moweez: /* ID */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
The ID of the segment is important. For example, it is part of a permalink when you include a segment. When you make changes to a segment such as splitting it, or changing the driving direction, the ID might change and traffic info can be lost. Also, after changing the ID, you can not set a closure until after the next map update.<br />
<br />
===View History===<br />
<br />
More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24553User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T17:24:35Z<p>Moweez: /* Updated/Created */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
You can find the last editor here, together with the date the segment was changed. The creation date and name may not always been shown due to import.<br />
<br />
===ID===<br />
===View History===<br />
<br />
More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24552User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T17:23:04Z<p>Moweez: /* Length */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
The length of a (saved) segment is shown here in rounded meters. A segment should not be shorter than 6 meters.<br />
<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
===ID===<br />
===View History===<br />
<br />
More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Speed_limit&diff=24551User:Moweez/Speed limit2020-08-23T17:18:23Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
<!--T:1--><br />
{{hiddenh2|Speed Limits}}<br />
We can attribute a Speed Limit (SL) to segments in WME. We can specify a unique value for each driving direction, and they will show in the app. Default SLs as given in the table below are applicable when there are no other signs present.<br />
<br />
<!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
|+style="text-align: left;" | <big>Default speed limits (Last update June 2020)</big><br />
! <br />
! colspan="4"| <b>Region</b><br />
|-<br />
! !! Flanders !! Brussels !! Wallonia !! Luxembourg<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic sign-urban area-f1b H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]]* || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-50.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Be-traffic_sign-end_of_urban_area-f3b_H.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-70.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-90.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Bord-F5-BE.png]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-120.jpg|50px]] || [[File:Be-traffic sign-C43-speedlimit-130.jpg|50px]] <br />
|-<br />
| || || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki>As of 1/1/2021, the default speed limit will be 30 km/h in Brussels' urban areas.<br />
<br />
==Mapping Guidelines==<br />
* Adding SLs must be based on certainties. You should be familiar with the area where you add them. Please do not enter SLs when you are not 100% sure.<br />
* Make sure you’re using the correct units for SLs! You can switch between Imperial and Metric by clicking on the tab with the ‘Gear’ icon in the left menu. The Gear icon is only visible when no segment or place is selected.<br />
* Speed limits like [[File:Be_Bord-30.jpg|20px]] are valid up to the next speed limit sign, or next junction (BE only). If no speed limit sign is visible, the SL in Belgium after next junction will be the default again. In Luxembourg, the given speed limit from the last sign still counts. Only speed limit signs with the word "zone" on it are valid for all the streets within the indicated area (see the paragraph below)<br />
* In some cases it may be required to split segments to be able to enter the correct SL. If the change of speed is near to a junction, it might be better not to create an extra segment. Keep the length of segments to at least 20 meters.<br />
<br />
==Special Cases==<br />
===Areas with a lowered speed limit=== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Bord-zone-30.png|right|60px]]<br />
In a zone with a <i>lowered speed limit</i>, the speed limit is valid for a clear demarcated area. In Belgium, a <i>school zone</i> is such a special area, with a speed limit of 30 km/h. These zones can be announced by a permanent/static, or by a dynamic/electronic 'zone 30' sign. In both cases, the SL must be entered as 30 km/h, if no other signs overrule them. Other zones are [[Road_types#Restricted_roads|residential areas and bicycle streets]]. <br />
<!--Mo: should school zone be entered to https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/Road_types#Restricted_roads as well?--><br />
<br />
===Average Speed Limit===<br />
If there is a stretch where the average speed limit is checked, the segments belonging to the stretch need to have the speed limit specified, as well as the average speed camera checked. See [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average Speed Camera]] for more details.<br />
<br />
===Variable speed limit=== <!--T:3--><br />
[[File:be_Matrixbord.png|300px|left]]<br />
The set SL might be overruled in real life by other signs, including dynamic signs. However, at the moment, there is no possibility to enter dynamic speed limits. Therefore, enter the SL as if no variable sign is present. We assume people will stIll watch the road and consider the signs while driving.<!--Mo: WHAT ABOUT TIME BASED SPEED LIMITS?-->{{clear}}<br />
<br />
<!--T:5--><br />
[[File:Wme-speed-helper.png|right|thumb|270px|Speedhelper script]]<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Speedhelper</b> helps speedup the input of speed limits. <br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13774-wme-speedhelper Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=166746&start=390&hilit=WME+Speedhelper Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Route Speeds</b> script to display the average speed and routing time over one or more segments, on different days and times<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/369630-wme-route-speeds-mapomatic-fork Install]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=105839&p=1781587&hilit=select#p1781587 Description and discusion on forum]<br />
</translate><br />
__NOTOC__<br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]] [[Category:Routing{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Index&diff=24549User:Moweez/Index2020-08-23T16:16:17Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
==Index by Keyword==<br />
<br />
<span style="color:#FF0000">links in red</span> are not yet translated, sorry for the inconvenience. Please use the English page.<br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable sortable"<br />
|-<br />
! width="32%" | English <br />
! width="32%" | français<br />
! width="32%" | Nederlands<br />
|-class="sorttop;" style="font-size:85%; line-height:1.2; color:gray; font-style: italic"<br />
! <small>use the arrows to sort on alphabet<br />
! <small>Utilisez d'abord les flèches pour trier par ordre alphabétique<br />
! <small>gebruik eerst de pijltjes om op alfabet te sorteren<br />
|-<br />
!style="background-position: center;"|<br> !!style="background-position: center;"| !!style="background-position: center;" |<br />
|-style="font-size:84%; line-height:1.2;"<br />
| <span style="display:none">-</span><!--AA-->[[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] [[#C|C]] [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] [[#I|I]] [[#J|J]] [[#K|K]] [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] [[#N|N]] [[#O|O]] [[#P|P]] [[#Q|Q]] [[#R|R]] [[#S|S]] [[#T|T]] [[#U|U]] [[#V|V]] [[#W|W]] [[#X|X]] [[#Y|Y]] [[#Z|Z]]<br />
| <span style="display:none">-</span> [[#A/fr|A]] [[#B/fr|B]] [[#C/fr|C]] [[#D/fr|D]] [[#E/fr|E]] [[#F/fr|F]] [[#G/fr|G]] [[#H/fr|H]] [[#I/fr|I]] [[#J/fr|J]] [[#K/fr|K]] [[#L/fr|L]] [[#M/fr|M]] [[#N/fr|N]] [[#O/fr|O]] [[#P/fr|P]] [[#Q/fr|Q]] [[#R/fr|R]] [[#S/fr|S]] [[#T/fr|T]] [[#U/fr|U]] [[#V/fr|V]] [[#W/fr|W]] [[#X/fr|X]] [[#Y/fr|Y]] [[#Z/fr|Z]]<br />
| <span style="display:none">-</span>[[#A/nl|A]] [[#B/nl|B]] [[#C/nl|C]] [[#D/nl|D]] [[#E/nl|E]] [[#F/nl|F]] [[#G/nl|G]] [[#H/nl|H]] [[#I/nl|I]] [[#J/nl|J]] [[#K/nl|K]] [[#L/nl|L]] [[#M/nl|M]] [[#N/nl|N]] [[#O/nl|O]] [[#P/nl|P]] [[#Q/nl|Q]] [[#R/nl|R]] [[#S/nl|S]] [[#T/nl|T]] [[#U/nl|U]] [[#V/nl|V]] [[#W/nl|W]] [[#X/nl|X]] [[#Y/nl|Y]] [[#Z/nl|Z]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>#</b> || <b>#</b> || <b>#</b> <br />
|-<br />
|4x4 see: [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road}}]] || |4x4 voir: [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/fr}}]] || |4x4 zie: [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| <b>{{anchor|A}}A || <b>{{anchor|A/fr}}A || <b>{{anchor|A/nl}}A<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Abbreviations}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Abbreviations/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Abbreviations/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Advanced_Guide]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Advanced_Guide/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Advanced_Guide/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
| Alley, see [[Narrow_Street]] || Ruelle, voir [[Narrow_Street/fr|Rue étroite]] || Steegje, zie [[Narrow_Street/nl|Smalle Straat]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Street and City names|Alternative Street name]] || [[Street and City names/fr|Nom de rue alternative]] || [[Street and City names/nl|Alternatieve Straatnaam]]<br />
|-<br />
| Alternative Street name, see [[Street and City names]] || Nom de rue alternative, voir [[{{PAGENAME:Street and City names/fr}}]] || Alternatieve Straatnaam, zie [[{{PAGENAME:Street and City names/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[Waze app|App]] || [[Waze app/fr|App]] || [[Waze app/nl|App]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[Editable area|Area, editable]] || [[Editable area/fr|Zone éditable]] || [[Editable area/nl|Gebied (in WME, bewerkbaar)]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Area Manager}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Area Manager/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Area Manager/nl}}]] <br />
|- <br />
| [[Places#Area Places|Area Places]] || [[Places/fr#Zones|Zones]] || [[Places/nl#Plaats.2Fgebied|Gebied (Plaats/POI)]]<br />
|- <br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:ATM Place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:ATM Place/nl}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:ATM Place/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average speed limit]] || [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average speed limit]] || [[Road_Aspects#Segment_Properties|Average speed limit]]<br />
|- <br />
| <b>{{anchor|B}}B || <b>{{anchor|B/fr}}B || <b>{{anchor|B/nl}}B<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Beta tester}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Beta tester/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Beta tester/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| <b>{{anchor|C}}C || <b>{{anchor|C/fr}}C || <b>{{anchor|C/nl}}C</b> <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Calamiteitenroutes}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Calamiteitenroutes/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Calamiteitenroutes/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Camera}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Camera/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Camera/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Place_categories#Shopping_and_services|Car rental place]] || [[Place_categories#Shopping_and_services|Car rental place]] || [[Place_categories#Shopping_and_services|Car rental place]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Charging Station Place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Charging Station Place/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Charging Station Place/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Street and City names|City name]] || [[Street and City names|City name]] || [[Street and City names|City name]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Closures}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Closures/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Closures/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Closures Bot}}]] ||[[{{PAGENAME:Closures Bot/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Closures Bot/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Community}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Community/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Community/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Community Levels}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Community Levels/fr ||}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Community Levels/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[App coordinates|Coordinates]] in the app || [[App coordinates|Coordinates]] in the app || [[App coordinates|Coordinates]] in the app<br />
|-<br />
| [[Roundabout|Cul de sac]] || [[Roundabout|Cul de sac]] || [[Roundabout|Cul de sac]]<br />
|-<br />
| <b>{{anchor|D}}D || <b>{{anchor|D/fr}}D || <b>{{anchor|D/nl}}D<br />
|-<br />
| [[Tools#Personal_Dashboard|Dashboard]] || [[Tools/fr#Personal_Dashboard|Dashboard]] || [[Tools/nl#Personal_Dashboard|Dashboard]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Detour Prevention Mechanism}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Detour Prevention Mechanism/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Detour Prevention Mechanism/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| Dirt road see: [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Discord}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Discord/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Discord/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| Drives see: [[Waze Map Editor#Drives|Waze Map Editor]] || Drives see: [[Waze Map Editor#Drives|Waze Map Editor]] || Drives see: [[Waze Map Editor#Drives|Waze Map Editor]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[Additional editing tips|Editing tips]] || [[Additional editing tips|Editing tips]] || [[Additional editing tips|Editing tips]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[Waze Map Editor|Editor (WME)]] || [[Waze Map Editor/fr|Editeur de cartes Waze (WME)]] || [[Waze Map Editor/nl|Editor (WME)]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Editor level}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Editor level/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Editor level/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Elevation}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Elevation/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Elevation/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| <b>{{anchor|F}}F || <b>{{anchor|F/fr}}F || <b>{{anchor|F/nl}}F<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Facebook}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Facebook/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Facebook/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| Feed see: [[Waze Map Editor#Feed|Waze Map Editor]] || Feed see: [[Waze Map Editor#Feed|Waze Map Editor]] || Feed see: [[Waze Map Editor#Feed|Waze Map Editor]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Ferry}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Ferry/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Ferry/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Road_Aspects#Filter_lanes|Filter lanes]] || [[Road_Aspects#Filter_lanes|Filter lanes]] || [[Road_Aspects#Filter_lanes|Filter lanes]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Flagged place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Flagged place/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Flagged place/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| Footpath see: [[Walking trail|walking trail]] and [[Pedestrian Boardwalk|pedestrian boardwalk]] || / || voetpad, zie [[Non-drivable_roads/nl#Walking_trail|Walking_trail]] en [[Non-drivable_roads/nl#Pedestrian_Boardwalk|Pedestrian_Boardwalk]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Forum}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Forum/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Forum/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Freeway}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Freeway/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Freeway/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| <b>{{anchor|G}}G || <b>{{anchor|G/fr}}G || <b>{{anchor|G/nl}}G<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Gas Station Place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Gas Station Place/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Gas Station Place/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Glossary Glossary] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Glossary Glossary] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Glossary Glossary] (global Wiki)<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:GPS}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:GPS/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:GPS/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|H}}H || <b>{{anchor|H/fr}}H || <b>{{anchor|H/nl}}H<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:House numbers}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:House numbers/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:House numbers/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|I}}I || <b>{{anchor|I/fr}}I || <b>{{anchor|I/nl}}I<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Improve your skills}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Improve your skills/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Improve your skills/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|J}}J || <b>{{anchor|J/fr}}J || <b>{{anchor|J/nl}}J<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Junction Arrows}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Junction Arrows/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Junction Arrows/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Junction Box}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Junction Box/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Junction Box/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Tools#Junction_Angle_Info|Junction Angle info (JAI)]] script || [[Tools/fr#Junction_Angle_Info|Junction Angle info (JAI)]] script || [[Tools/nl#Junction_Angle_Info|Junction Angle info (JAI)]] script<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|K}}K || <b>{{anchor|K/fr}}K || <b>{{anchor|K/nl}}K<br />
|-<br />
|[https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Keyboard_shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Keyboard_shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Keyboard_shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts] (global Wiki)<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:KISS}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:KISS/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:KISS/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|L}}L || <b>{{anchor|L/fr}}L || <b>{{anchor|L/nl}}L<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Lane Guidance}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Lane Guidance/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Lane Guidance/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Live map}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Live map/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Live map/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Locks}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Locks/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Locks/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_loop_road|Loop roads]] || [[Quick_start_guide/fr#Cr.C3.A9er_une_route_en_boucle|Boucles]] || [[Quick_start_guide/nl#Een_lus_in_de_weg_maken|Lussen in de weg]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|M}}M || <b>{{anchor|M/fr}}M || <b>{{anchor|M/nl}}M<br />
|-<br />
|[[WME Magic|Magic]] || [[WME Magic/fr|Magic]] || [[WME Magic/nl|Magic]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Major Highway}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Major Highway/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Major Highway/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Major Traffic Events}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Major Traffic Events/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Major Traffic Events/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Map Comment}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Map Comment/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Map Comment/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Map Problems}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Map Problems/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Map Problems/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Mapraid}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Mapraid/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Mapraid/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Improve_your_skills#Mass_edits|Mass editing]] || [[Improve_your_skills#Mass_edits|Mass editing]] || [[Improve_your_skills#Mass_edits|Mass editing]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Minor Highway}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Minor Highway/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Minor Highway/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Motorcycling}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Motorcycling/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Motorcycling/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:Road Munching}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road Munching/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road Munching/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|N}}N || <b>{{anchor|N/fr}}N || <b>{{anchor|N/nl}}N<br />
|-<br />
|[[Narrow_Street|Narrow street]] road type || [[Narrow_Street/fr|Rue étroite]] || [[Narrow_Street/nl|Smalle Straat]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[{{PAGENAME:New Housing Development}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:New Housing Development/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:New Housing Development/nl}}]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Nodes}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Nodes/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Nodes/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Non-drivable roads}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Non-drivable roads/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Non-drivable roads/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|O}}O || <b>{{anchor|O/fr}}O || <b>{{anchor|O/nl}}O<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Off-road}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Off-road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
| [[Tools#WME_OpenMaps_script|OpenMaps script]] || [[Tools#WME_OpenMaps_script|OpenMaps script]] || [[Tools#WME_OpenMaps_script|OpenMaps script]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|P}}P || <b>{{anchor|P/fr}}P || <b>{{anchor|P/nl}}P<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Road}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Road/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Place/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Parking Lot Place/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Paving}}]] a new road || [[{{PAGENAME:Paving/fr}}]] a new road || [[{{PAGENAME:Paving/nl}}]] a new road<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Pedestrian Boardwalk}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Pedestrian Boardwalk/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Pedestrian Boardwalk/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Nodes|Phantom nodes]] || [[Nodes|Phantom nodes]] || [[Nodes|Phantom nodes]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[PL|Permalink]] || [[PL|Permalink]] || [[PL|Permalink]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Place categories}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Place categories/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Place categories/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Place update request}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Place update request/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Place update request/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Places}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Places/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Places/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Places#Point Places|Point places]] || [[Places#Point Places|Point places]] || [[Places#Point Places|Point places]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Primary Street}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Primary Street/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Primary Street/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Private road}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Private road/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Private road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Pedestrian Boardwalk|Public transport]] || [[Pedestrian Boardwalk|Public transport]] || [[Pedestrian Boardwalk|Public transport]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|Q}}Q || <b>{{anchor|Q/fr}}Q || <b>{{anchor|Q/nl}}Q<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Quick start guide}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Quick start guide/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Quick start guide/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|R}}R || <b>{{anchor|R/fr}}R || <b>{{anchor|R/nl}}R<br />
|-<br />
|[[Non-drivable_roads#Railroads|Railroad]] || [[Non-drivable_roads#Railroads|Railroad]] || [[Non-drivable_roads/nl#Spoorlijnen|Spoorlijn]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Railroad crossing}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Railroad crossing/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Railroad crossing/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Ramp}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Ramp/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Ramp/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Resources}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Resources/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Resources/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Residential Place}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Residential Place/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Residential Place/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Restrictions}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Restrictions/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Restrictions/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Road_Aspects#Ring_roads|Ring roads]] || [[Road_Aspects#Ring_roads|Ring roads]] || [[Road_Aspects#Ring_roads|Ring roads]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Road Aspects}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road Aspects/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road Aspects/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Road types}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road types/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Road types/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Roundabout}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Roundabout/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Roundabout/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Routing}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Routing/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Routing/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Runway/Taxiway}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Runway/Taxiway/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Runway/Taxiway/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|S}}S || <b>{{anchor|S/fr}}S || <b>{{anchor|S/nl}}S<br />
|-<br />
|[[Tools#Scripts|Scripts]] || [[Tools#Scripts|Scripts]] || [[Tools#Scripts|Scripts]]<br />
|-<br />
|[https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Search_codes Search codes] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Search_codes Search codes] (global Wiki) || [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Search_codes Search codes] (global Wiki)<br />
|-<br />
|[[Service Area]] (highway) || [[Service Area]] (highway) || [[Service Area]] (highway)<br />
|-<br />
|[[Road_Aspects#Shopping_streets|Shopping streets]] allowed during certain hours for loading/unloading || [[Road_Aspects#Shopping_streets|Shopping streets]] allowed during certain hours for loading/unloading || [[Road_Aspects#Shopping_streets|Shopping streets]] allowed during certain hours for loading/unloading<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Slack}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Slack/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Slack/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Stairway}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Stairway/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Stairway/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Starters Summary}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Starters Summary/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Starters Summary/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Street}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Street/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Street/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Street and City names|Street name]] || [[Street and City names|Street name]] || [[Street and City names/nl|Straatnaam]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|T}}T || <b>{{anchor|T/fr}}T || <b>{{anchor|T/nl}}T<br />
|-<br />
|[[Tools#Tampermonkey|Tampermonkey]] || [[Tools#Tampermonkey|Tampermonkey]] || [[Tools#Tampermonkey|Tampermonkey]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[Places#More_Info_tab|Telephone number]] || [[Places#More_Info_tab|Telephone number]] || [[Places#More_Info_tab|Telephone number]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[What do they say|Tests]] || [[What do they say|Tests]] || [[What do they say|Tests]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[Text to speak|Text to speech]] || [[Text to speak|Text to speech]] || [[Text to speak|Text to speech]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Toll road}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Toll road/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Toll road/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]] || [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]] || [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Tools}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Tools/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Tools/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Turn restriction]], see [[Junction Arrows]] || [Turn restriction]], see [[Junction Arrows]] || [Turn restriction]], see [[Junction Arrows]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Twitter}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Twitter/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Twitter/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|U}}U || <b>{{anchor|U/fr}}U || <b>{{anchor|U/nl}}U<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:U-turn}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:U-turn/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:U-turn/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Road Aspects|Unpaved]] segment attribute || [[Road Aspects|Unpaved]] segment attribute || [[Road Aspects|Unpaved]] segment attribute<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:UR overview page}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:UR overview page/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:UR overview page/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Update request}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Update request/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Update request/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[Userscript Guidelines|User script Guidelines for script developers]] || [[Userscript Guidelines|User script Guidelines for script developers]] || [[Userscript Guidelines|User script Guidelines for script developers]]<br />
|-<br />
|[[Tools#Scripts|User scripts]] || [[Tools#Scripts|User scripts]] || [[Tools#Scripts|User scripts]]<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|V}}V || <b>{{anchor|V/fr}}V || <b>{{anchor|V/nl}}V<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|W}}W || <b>{{anchor|W/fr}}W || <b>{{anchor|W/nl}}W<br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Walking trail}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Walking trail/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Walking trail/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Waze app}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze app/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze app/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Waze Map Editor}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze Map Editor/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze Map Editor/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Waze status page}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze status page/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Waze status page/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Wiki}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Wiki Translation}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki Translation/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki Translation/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|[[{{PAGENAME:Wiki updates}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki updates/fr}}]] || [[{{PAGENAME:Wiki updates/nl}}]] <br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|X}}X || <b>{{anchor|X/fr}}X || <b>{{anchor|X/nl}}X<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|Y}}Y || <b>{{anchor|Y/fr}}Y || <b>{{anchor|Y/nl}}Y<br />
|-<br />
|<b>{{anchor|Z}}Z || <b>{{anchor|Z/fr}}Z || <b>{{anchor|Z/nl}}Z<br />
|-style="font-size:84%; line-height:1.2;"<br />
| <span style="display:none">ZZ</span>[[#A|A]] [[#B|B]] [[#C|C]] [[#D|D]] [[#E|E]] [[#F|F]] [[#G|G]] [[#H|H]] [[#I|I]] [[#J|J]] [[#K|K]] [[#L|L]] [[#M|M]] [[#N|N]] [[#O|O]] [[#P|P]] [[#Q|Q]] [[#R|R]] [[#S|S]] [[#T|T]] [[#U|U]] [[#V|V]] [[#W|W]] [[#X|X]] [[#Y|Y]] [[#Z|Z]]<br />
| <span style="display:none">ZZ</span> [[#A/fr|A]] [[#B/fr|B]] [[#C/fr|C]] [[#D/fr|D]] [[#E/fr|E]] [[#F/fr|F]] [[#G/fr|G]] [[#H/fr|H]] [[#I/fr|I]] [[#J/fr|J]] [[#K/fr|K]] [[#L/fr|L]] [[#M/fr|M]] [[#N/fr|N]] [[#O/fr|O]] [[#P/fr|P]] [[#Q/fr|Q]] [[#R/fr|R]] [[#S/fr|S]] [[#T/fr|T]] [[#U/fr|U]] [[#V/fr|V]] [[#W/fr|W]] [[#X/fr|X]] [[#Y/fr|Y]] [[#Z/fr|Z]]<br />
| <span style="display:none">ZZ</span>[[#A/nl|A]] [[#B/nl|B]] [[#C/nl|C]] [[#D/nl|D]] [[#E/nl|E]] [[#F/nl|F]] [[#G/nl|G]] [[#H/nl|H]] [[#I/nl|I]] [[#J/nl|J]] [[#K/nl|K]] [[#L/nl|L]] [[#M/nl|M]] [[#N/nl|N]] [[#O/nl|O]] [[#P/nl|P]] [[#Q/nl|Q]] [[#R/nl|R]] [[#S/nl|S]] [[#T/nl|T]] [[#U/nl|U]] [[#V/nl|V]] [[#W/nl|W]] [[#X/nl|X]] [[#Y/nl|Y]] [[#Z/nl|Z]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24546User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T15:50:19Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Roads are build by segments in WME. These segments can contain a lot of extra information. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
===ID===<br />
===View History===<br />
<br />
More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Road_attributes&diff=24544User:Moweez/Road attributes2020-08-23T15:49:03Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Road attributes overview}}<br />
Without roads, no navigation. When selecting one or more segments, 3 tabs will be available in the left menu: General, [[{{PAGENAME:Closures{{#translation:}}}}]], and [[Lane Guidance|Lanes]]. On this page, the properties of road segments as found in general tab are briefly described, with links to in-depth info if available. <br />
<br />
==Address==<br />
Clicking on the address field shows 3 fields: Street, City, and Country. For most road types both Street and City name should be specified, or the checkbox <i>None</i> should be marked. <br />
<br />
The country field is normally prefilled with the proper country name, but more are available in border areas. <br />
<br />
===Alternative name===<br />
If a (primary) street name is given, an alternative name can be attributed as well. This can be the same street name with a different city name, or a different street name (with same or different city name). In case of a street in a border area, with adresses in multiple countries, see ???.<br />
<br />
===TTS/Pronounciation===<br />
Behind the street name you'll see a loudspeaker where you can test the pronounciation of the given name (Text to Speech - TTS). Note that we often use abbreviations in the street names to shorten the length. See the page on [[TTS]] for details.<br />
<br />
More info on naming:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Street and City_names{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Road types{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:TTS{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Road type==<br />
A very important aspect, see [[Road types]]<br />
<br />
===Road type attributes===<br />
Directly under the road type are check boxes with extra attributes (add picture).<br />
<br />
====Unpaved====<br />
Used for roads that are unpaved, but well drivable. Can be attributed to every road type. For roads that are badly maintained and (often) not drivable with a normal car, use the road type [[Off-road|Off-road / Not_maintained]].<br />
<br />
The app has a setting for using Unpaved roads. The default is "Don't allow". Other values are "Allow" and "Avoid long ones".<br />
<br />
====Tunnel====<br />
Check this box if the road goes underground or under water. <!--Because of bad GPS and/or internet reception in a tunnel, we need to mark it to be able to still get the right instructions.??--><br />
*About 20m before entrance and after exit, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]<br />
*Mark the checkbox for tunnel on the part that physically goes underground<br />
*Elevation should be set to -1 (or lower if necessary)<br />
<br />
====Headlights required====<br />
The headlight warning is given each time in the app when a route is started that passes a segment with Headlight required checked. This warning only makes sense in the few countries for which this warning was developed. Better leave this attribute unchecked.??<br />
<br />
====Next to carpool/HOV/bus lane====<br />
Only used when a road is next to a lane that is used by different kind of traffic with different speed, like a bus lane. HOV is a type of road in the US where only some cars may drive, not applicable in Belgium.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Routing==<br />
Optional unfavored-neutral-preferred<br />
<br />
==Restrictions==<br />
See [[Editing/Roads/Restrictions|Restrictions]] <br />
<br />
==Direction==<br />
Here you specify the driving direction of the road. Two-way or one-way. Define one-way by the letters showing in the nodes if a segment is selected (A>B or B>A). <br />
<br />
==Speed Limit==<br />
[[File:W4-tachometr.png|60px|frameless|left]]<br />
While updating the roads, you may as well check the speed limits (SLs). Please check if there are existing SLs and make sure not to override them. More info on the page [[{{PAGENAME:Speed limit{{#translation:}}}}]].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
===Average Speed Cameras===<br />
[[File:Average-speed-camera.png|right]]<br />
Next to the speed limit fields, you can check the boxes for Average Speed Camera (ASC). If an ASC zone starts or ends in the middle of an existing segment, [[Quick_start_guide#Cutting_a_segment|create a new junction node]]. If the start/end is approximately 20m from an existing node, this is not necessary. <br />
<br />
When ASC are placed, but they are not yet operational, use [[Camera#False_Camera|dummy camera's]] for the time being<br />
.<br />
==Lock==<br />
Roads that need more protection because of special situations (construction, complicated design, frequent editing errors) may be locked higher. '''Make sure to thoroughly check the routing in the live map, before you lock the roads.''' <br />
<br />
If you need to edit a road above your lock level, ask an unlock.<br />
<br />
==Elevation==<br />
Elevation levels should be conform how they are in reality.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Select entire street==<br />
<br />
==Edit housenumbers==<br />
<br />
==Other road properties==<br />
===Length===<br />
===Updated/Created===<br />
===ID===<br />
===View History===<br />
<br />
More info:<br />
*[[{{PAGENAME:Page{{#translation:}}}}]]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
<!--[[Category:Roads{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Road attributes{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Place_categories&diff=24542User:Moweez/Place categories2020-08-23T14:47:49Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Place categories}} <!--T:1--><br />
Waze has several major categories, which in turn includes quite a number of sub categories. If you choose a main category within WME, you automatically get to see the sub-categories to choose from. It is also possible to directly type in a category. <br />
<br />
The [[Places|Place]] categories used in Waze are not always directly applicable in BeLux, for they are global categories. At this time, it is not possible to adapt these categories to local customs. If you cannot find an applicable sub category, just use the main category and add the [[#Missing_Categories|missing category]] in front of the name in the alternate name field. <br />
<br />
This overview shows the categories used for the [[Places|Waze Places]]. For mapping guidelines, please read the page about [[User:Moweez/Places| Places]].<br />
<br />
Note that circumstances may require a different approach. The different regions use a different locking strategy (see table below). In any case, if a Place needs more protection, a higher lock level can be used.<br />
<br />
{{anchor|region}}<br />
==Regional differences==<br />
{| class="wikitable" border="0" bgcolor="#a7d2df"<br />
! colspan="5" width="99%" | Regional guidelines<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Flanders</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" |<b>Brussels</b> <br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Wallonia</b><br />
| width="22%" align="center" | <b>Luxembourg</b><br />
|-<br />
<!--|Name <br />
| The use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] is discouraged<br />
| Use French as main name, Flemish as alternate name<br />
| preference for the use of [[User:Moweez/Places#Name|picto's in the name]] if available<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
|type <br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Large places that are significant and helpful for orientation to the driver can be mapped as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]]<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
| Places with minimum area size of 500 m<sup>2</sup> are always mapped with an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]].<br />
|- --><br />
| lock <br />
| If a lock is required, the minimum lock level is described in the tables below.<br />
| Places may be locked at L3 or higher when considered completed. In any case, do not reduce the lock of complete POIs.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
| Places that are considered complete, aka contain all relevant information available, are locked to L3, to prevent unwanted edits.<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
==Categories==<br />
=== {{@|Parking Lot}}=== <!--T:2--><br />
{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! || Parking {Name} || 2 <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<!--{| class="wikitable" style="font-size:90%;" <br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! type !! colspan="2"| Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| || || || || <b>Fl || <b>W<br />
|-<br />
| [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] || Always map as an Area! <br>For distinctive parking areas || {Name} || area || 2 || 3<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
--><small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
<!--===Car Services 4===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! Description !! Naming !! style="width: 8%" | [[#region]] !! type !! Lock >=<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Example: ⛽️ Shell VanPé. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field<br />
| {picto} {Brand} {Name} || <b>Be, Lu || area || 3<br />
|-<br />
| rowspan="3" | Garage / Automotive Shop || rowspan="3" |Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer || rowspan="3" |{Brand} {Name} <br />
| <b>Fl, Br || point || rowspan="3" | 3<br />
|- <br />
| || <br />
|-<br />
| <b>Wa, Lu || point, area if > 500m2 <br />
|-<br />
| rowspan="3" | Car Wash || rowspan="3" | || rowspan="3" | {Name} <br />
| <b>Fl, Br || point || 1<br />
|- <br />
| || || <br />
|-<br />
| <b>Wa, Lu || area if > 500m2 || 3<br />
|-<br />
| rowspan="3" | [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || rowspan="3" | Example: Essent 20kW (2) || rowspan="3" | {Provider} {MaxPower} ({Amount}<br />
| <b>Fl, Br || point || rowspan="3" | 3<br />
|- <br />
| || || || <br />
|-<br />
| <b>Wa, Lu ||area if > 500m<sup>2</sup><br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
===Car Services 5=== <br />
Regional differences are represented by '''Be'''=Belgium, '''F'''=Flanders, '''Br'''=Brussels, '''W'''=Wallonia, '''L'''=Luxembourg<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! type !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field || <b>F, Br</b>: {Brand} {Name}; e.g., <br>Shell VanPé<br><b>W, L</b>: {picto} {Brand} {Name}, e.g., <br>⛽️ Shell VanPé || area || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer<br />
| {Brand} {Name} || point* || <b>F,Br,L</b>: 1<br><b>W</b>: 3<br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} || point* || <b>F,Br,L</b>: 1<br><b>W</b>: 3<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} {MaxPower} ({Amount} || point* || 3<br />
|}<br />
<small><nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place is larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>, map it as an [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|Area Place]] in Wallonia and Luxembourg</small><br />
<br />
-->=== {{@|Car Services}} === <!--T:3--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
| [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]<br />
| Always map as an Area of more than 500m<sup>2</sup> <br><br> Use the Brand and official name. If there is a locally different name in use, put it in alternative name field. || { picto} + {Brand} + {Name}, e.g., <br>Main name: ⛽️ Shell VanPé (this name can be found on the brand's website) <br>Alternative: ⛽️ Shell Nandrain (locality name if different from the official name) || 3<br />
|-<br />
| Garage / Automotive Shop <br />
| Technical inspection, Tire center, Independent garage, Body Shop. Official brand, choose dealer <br />
| {Brand} + {Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Wash <br />
| || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| [[Charging Station Place|Charging Stations]] || Essent 20kW (2) || {Provider} + {MaxPower} + ({Amount} || 3<br />
|}<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
=== {{@|Transportation}} === <!--T:4--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#region|Regional Guidelines]] || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Airport || You can replace "airport" in the name with the picto ✈, but the picto should be in front <br />
|{Name}, e.g.,<br />
: Brussels Airport<br />
: ✈ Brussels <br />
| 3<br />
|-<br />
| Bus Station || <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {Location} + {Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': <br />
:-in large cities:<br><br />
: {station name} + ({operator})<br />
:-outside large cities:<br />
: {city} + {station name} + ({operator})<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Ferry Pier || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Seaport / Marina / Harbor || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Subway Station || Underground Station for or Metro. Put the city name in front of the station name if different <br />
|<br />
*'''Fl?''': {City} + {Station Name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Train Station || e.g., Station Antwerpen<br />
| <br />
*'''Fl?''': "Station" + {station name}<br />
*'''Br, Wal & Lux''': {station name}<br />
: alternate name:<br><br />
: "Station" + {station name}<br />
| <br />
|-<br />
| Bridge || Use only to represent a named road bridge with local or navigational significance || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Tunnel || || {Tunnel Name} || <br />
|-<br />
| Taxi Station || || || <br />
|- <br />
| Junction / Interchange || || Junction {Name} || <br />
|- <br />
| Rest area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Carpool spot || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| <i>others / without sub category</i> || all other POIs belonging to transportation, and not to car services. Examples:<br> || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || Car Sharing & Bike Sharing Stations || {operator} + {station name} || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
===Professional and public=== <!--T:5--><br />
For public buildings or services such as fire departments, town halls and the like, we write the location after the name of the building or service, e.g., Stadhuis Antwerpen. For Organisations that have several locations, specify the location after a hyphen, after the general name of the organisation, e.g., UZ leuven - campus Gasthuisberg.<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Cemetery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| City Hall || local name use || {Building/Service} {Municipality} || <br />
|-<br />
| College / University || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Conventions / Event Center || || ||<br />
|- <br />
| Courthouse || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Doctor / Clinic || Use this category for non-urgent medical care. See for urgent medical care ''Hospital / Medical Care'' below || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Embassy / Consulate || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Emergency shelter || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Factory / industrial || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fire department || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Government || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Hospital / Urgent Care || Hospitals, First Aid Posts and other places that offer emergency aid. Use ''Doctor / Clinic'' for non-urgent medical care || || <br />
|-<br />
| Information point || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Kindergarten || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Library || || {City} {location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Military || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Offices || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Organization or Association || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Police Station || || {City} {department} || <br />
|-<br />
| Prison / Correctional Facility || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Post Office || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Religious Center | || || <br />
|-<br />
| School || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Trash & Recycling facility|| || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied<br />
</small><br />
<br />
===Shopping and services===<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Arts and Crafts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| [[ATM Place|ATM]] || Use the translation for ATM, followed by the brand, e.g., "Geldautomaat SNS Bank" || ATM {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bank / Financial || || {Brand} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bookstore || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Car Dealership || In case there is a gas station, use ''Gas Station'' as the primary category unless they have different opening times || {Brand} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Car rental || Rental-car facilities and returns, including at airports, should be marked as a Point with the “Rental Car” Place category. If the return location is a normal Parking Lot, then mark it with the [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot]] category and the building with the Car Rental category<br />
|| ||<br />
|-<br />
| Convenience Store || like a kiosk || || <br />
|-<br />
| Currency Exchange || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Department Store || like De Bijenkorf? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Electronics || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fashion and Clothing || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Flowers || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Furniture / Home Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Gifts || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Gym / Fitness || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hardware Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Jewelry || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Laundry / Dry Cleaning || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Market || || {City} {Location} || <br />
|-<br />
| Music Store || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Personal Care || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pet Store / Veterinarian || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pharmacy || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Photography || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Shopping Center || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sporting Goods || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Supermarket / Grocery || Delhaize. Intermarché, Lidl || {Brand} {Location} ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swimming Pool || solely public swimming pools || || <br />
|-<br />
| Toy Store || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Travel Agency || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Food and Drink=== <!--T:6--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Bakery || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Bar || Note: a "Plaza" is not a Place (in French) but a food court/food market. || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Coffee shop || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dessert || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Fast Food || McDonald's may include drive-thru, then draw [[Parking Lot Road]] || || <br />
|-<br />
| Food Court || Can be used for a caterer or a wholesaler || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ice Cream || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Restaurant || || {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Culture and Entertainment=== <!--T:7--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Art Gallery || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Casino || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Club || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Game Club || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Movie Theater || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Museum || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Music Venue || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Performing Arts Venue || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Racing Track || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Stadium / Arena || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Theme Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Theater || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Tourist Attraction / Historic Site || If the place functions as a landmark it may be represented as an Area Place || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Zoo / Aquarium || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Other=== <!--T:8--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
|-<br />
| Construction Site || Construction sites are not necessariliy mapped but it may be useful for editors checking roadworks under way. Ask your Country Manager in case of doubt || ||<br />
|-<br />
| || General category for all landmarks you can't find an existing suitable category for; add the missing category in front of the name || {missing category} {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Lodging=== <!--T:9--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
<br />
|-<br />
| Bed & Breakfast || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Camping / Trailer Park || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Cottage / Cabin || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hostel || Used for Motels and Inns in the BeLux || F1 hotel Waalwijk ||<br />
|-<br />
| Hotel || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Outdoors=== <!--T:10--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Beach || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Golf Course || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Park || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Playground || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Plaza || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Pool || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Promenade || Probably not used in the BeLux || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Scenic Lookout / Viewpoint || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Ski Area || || || <br />
|-<br />
| Sports Court || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
===Natural features=== <!--T:11--><br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! Sub-category !! style="width: 30%" | Description / Examples !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805;<br />
|-<br />
| || colspan="2" | <center><b>check out the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details || <center><b>* <br />
|-<br />
| Farm || Farmlands should <i>never</i> be mapped as areas. Editors should remove farmland areas immediately.?? || || <br />
|-<br />
| Forest / Grove || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Island || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| River / Stream || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? Features under approximately 20 meters wide will not be visible in the Waze app. Handy tool for drawing rivers: street to river || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Sea / Lake / Pool || Use only if water itself is visually obvious to drivers on nearby roads.?? || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Canal || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Swamp / Marsh || || ||<br />
|-<br />
| Dam || || ||<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<small><br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied</small><br />
<br />
== {{@| Missing Categories}} ==<br />
If you cannot find a suitable category, choose the most applicable category. You can add the missing category in front of the name in the alternate name field.<br><br />
Example: Butcher Sans Os<br><br />
*main Waze Category: ''Supermarket/Grocery''. <br />
* Primary name: "Sans Os". <br />
* alternate name: "butcher Sans Os"<br />
Note that when the name in itself is clear enough indicative for the kind of Place (ING, Décathlon, Carrefour, etc.) there is no need to put a category in front of the name. <br />
<br />
{| class="wikitable"<br />
! category !! style="width: 30%" | WME Category to use !! style="width: 30%" | Naming !! Lock &#8805; *<br />
|-<br />
|Community center || Conventions / Event center || primary: {Name}<br>alternate: {missing category} + {Name} ||<br />
|-<br />
|Village hall ||Conventions / Event center || ||<br />
|-<br />
|Dentist || Doctor / Clinic || || <br />
|-<br />
|Residential care centers || Personale Care || || <br />
|-<br />
|Butcher || Supermarket/Grocery || || <br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<nowiki>*</nowiki> If the place needs to be protected, a higher lock level can be applied. See the [[#Regional_differences|Regional Guidelines]] for details</small><br />
<br />
==Tools==<br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality Places,such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum].<br />
* <b>WME Split POI script</b> This script adds a button to the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] that allows you to split or cut Places from the category <i>Natural Features</i> into two, keeping the specifics. Can be used for all Natural Features like Island, Sea/Lake/Pool, River/Stream, Forest/Grove, Farm, Canal, Swamp / Marsh, Dam<br />
: [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Description and discussion on the forum]<br />
: [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=User:Moweez/Places&diff=24541User:Moweez/Places2020-08-23T14:42:35Z<p>Moweez: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{Proposal}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
{{hiddenh2|Places}}<!--T:1--><br />
Places are searchable destinations in the Waze map, just like the "Points of Interest" found in other maps and GPS devices. They can be added from the client, but also from the Waze Map Editor (WME). By default, Waze will show categories depending on size, type and situation. For instance, if you search for a supermarket, Waze will show you the supermarkets in the neighbourhood. When driving fast, less will be shown to keep the map clear. <br />
<br />
How to create a <i>Place</i> is described in the [[Quick_start_guide#Create_a_Place|Quick Start Guide]]. For a description of the different types of places, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:34--><br />
A Place can be a <i>Point</i> or an <i>Area</i>. Depending on size and situation, <i>Area Places</i> can be visible in the client. A <i>Point Place</i> is not visible, but will show up when searched for and navigated to. There is also a third kind of Place called [[Places#Residential or Private Places|Residential]], which are private addresses. <br />
<br />
<!--T:36--><br />
The Waze routing server will navigate the Wazer onto the segment which is physically closest to the center of the <i>Place</i>. If this is undesirable, you can adjust the navigation goal by adding an [[Places#Entry Points .2F the navigation goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:35--><br />
__TOC__<br />
<br />
=={{@|Point Places}}== <!--T:22--><br />
<i>Point Places</i> don't show on the Wazers device, but are listed in the search results. They are used to help Wazers find locations, especially when they are not or wrongly listed in other search engines.<br />
<br />
In WME, a <i>Point Place</i> appears as a small circle:<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place.png]] Standard point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place selected.png|40px|middle]] Selected point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place changed.png]] Modified point<br /><br />
[[File:Wme place pending update.png]] Modified point, pending for approval<br />
<br />
The <i>Point Place</i> is to be positioned at or close to the segment that should be used in the navigation. Typically, this will be the (main) entrance. Try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. If this location differs a lot from the geographical location, you can add an [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:37--><br />
Please try to add as much useful [[Places#Places details|details]], like the address, telephone number if applicable, etc..<br />
<br />
=={{@|Area Places}}== <!--T:4--><br />
<i>Area Places</i> appear in the Waze app. Too many of them can clutter the map, creating large gray zones that do not help Wazers orient themselves. Too little of them leaves us with an empty map without much clue as to where we are. Therefore, we like to see <i>Area Places</i> that are distinctive and significant, but that is subjective. One objective criterium we can use is the size: If they are '''larger than 500 m<sup>2</sup>''', you may map it as an <i>Area Places</i> . See also the paragraph on [[Places#When_to_use_Area_or_Point|how to determine Area or Point]]. <br />
<br />
<!--T:23--><br />
[[File:WME_Area_Place_Namur_Hospital.PNG|thumb|Area Place for the Namur hospital, with the <i>Entry point</i> at the entrance, and the <i>Move Handle</i> on the top right of the building]]<br />
<br />
<b>Outline</b><br />
: Generally, an <i>Area Place</i> covers what a Wazer sees when driving to the actual location. <br />
: Keep the shape simple; Waze will anyway simplify the place in the App. Consider mapping with a basic rectangle. <br />
:We have two options:<br />
:# Map the edges of the building: Used for individual significant buildings. Think of big supermarkets, a lighthouse, churches or mosques, etc..<br />
:# Map the visible contour of the area: Handy for natural features and building clusters such as a universities campus, shopping malls, factories, parks, forests, etc... [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]]) are always mapped to their property lines. <br />
: If the Area itself needs to be modified, click on the place to select it. Use the [[Quick_start_guide#Changing_elements_on_the_map|geometry nodes]] to adjust the shape. To move an area place without changing its shape, drag the [[File:Wme place drag handle.png]] Move Handle icon.<br />
: Care should be taken not to snap to road segment nodes, because this makes it more difficult to edit the place and/or segments later on.<br />
:Do not overlap <i>Area Places</i> to prevent grey areas without distinction. Read more on [[Places#Combined_Places|combining places]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:24--><br />
<b>Colors</b><br />
: The different types of <i>Area Places</i> show in different colors in the Waze app. The colors vary slightly, depending on your display. Generally, Natural features show green (e.g., Park) or blue (e.g., River).<br />
<br />
<!--T:19--><br />
<b>Navigation</b><br />
: When the center of the <i>Area Place</i> is not closest to the desired navigation destination, define the navigation goal by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry point]]. This point can be moved to where you should arrive, or where to park. Again, try to imagine where you would stop to drop someone off for this location. <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Residential or Private Places}}== <!--T:5--><br />
<i>Residential Places</i> are a special kind of <i>Point Places</i> shown as triangles in WME. When arriving, Waze proposes to take a picture of your destination. In this way, many private Places are uploaded. For these private Places, the category <i>Residential</i> is used. Private Places will not be searchable, and the identity of whoever created them will not be exposed. Private Places only contain photos and an exact address, without all the other properties of a Place. The pictures will only show to people driving explicitly to that address. Waze editors can use the pictures and exact locations to improve the [[house numbers]] database.<br />
<br />
<!--T:6--><br />
[[File:WME Places convertresidential.jpg|thumb|left]]<br />
<br />Public Places can be turned into private Places, but private Places cannot be turned into public Places. Use the link located under the buttons for Point or Area in the menu, to convert <i>Places</i> mistakenly labeled as public into private.<br /><br />
More on this topic see the [[Residential Place]] page.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Entry point / the navigation goal}}== <!--T:38--><br />
By default, Waze navigates to the segment that is closest to the centre of the <i>Place</i>. For <i>Point Places</i> this is obvious, for <i>Area Places</i> it is rather guessing. You can change the destination for the navigation by adding an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] <i>entry point</i>. <br />
[[File:WME-entry point.PNG|thumb|super|80px|entry point in WME]]<br />
<br />
[[File:WME-menu_add_entry_point.PNG|left|80px]] Add the entry point from the menu left.<br />
<br />
[[File:WME_add_entry_point.PNG|40px|left]] Adding it will show a blue dot with moving arrows at the center of the <i>Place</i> (picture left). Drag it to the location where Waze should bring you when navigating to this <i>Place</i>. Imagine where to park, or where you would stop to drop someone off for this location.<br />
<br />
<!--T:39--><br />
The set entry point will show like a small blue circle with an arrow inside pointing towards the destination, and a broken line that connects to the <i>Place</i> (picture on the right).<br />
<br />
Multiple entry points can be added and named, but the function is not yet stable in the application. For now, better use a [[Places#Combined Places|combination of Area and Point Places]] to define multiple entrances.<!--for wiki editor: to check stability progress see this forum post: https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=8&t=277779--> <br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|When to use Area or Point}} == <!--T:8--><br />
The basic guideline is: Places larger than 500m<sup>2</sup> may be drawn as an [[User:Moweez/Places#Area_Places|Area Place]]. They can function as a visual guide on your drive. <br />
<br />
Avoid Areas within Areas, and overlapping Areas, as this may become confusing on the client's display. When there are various destinations in one building or a larger distinct area, better use a combination of Area and Point as described in next paragraph on [[#Combined_Places|Combined Places]]. Only [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lot Places]] can be stacked.<br />
<br />
Do not map underground Places as Areas, except for [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]].<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-Area-Places distinct-drawing.jpg|thumb|180 px|buildings mapped as distinct Areas]]<br />
Clusters of areas would also become one grey area, with only the names being on the map. If you'd like them distinct, you need to leave space between the Areas (see picture), or [[User:Moweez/Places#Combined_Places|combine them]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:17--><br />
Regardless of its size. we always map [[Parking Lot Place|Parking Lots]] and [[Gas Station Place|Gas Stations]] as an <i>Area Place</i>, and farms as a <i>Point Place</i>. The area for a [[Gas Station Place|Gas Station]] must cover at least 500m<sup>2</sup>, for visibility reasons in the app. <br />
<br />
Smart mapping: Size is not always the only criterion deciding whether to map an Area or Point Place. We can think a bit further, especially from the driver's perspective. A building hidden in the woods might be large, but neither significant nor distinctive, as it won't help the driver orient during the drive; instead displaying it might have him wonder if he is on the correct route as he doesn't see it from the road. The same goes for a water treatment plant: it may be large, but probably not recognizable from the road. So even though being large, we only need them to show approaching our destination and they can be mapped as a <i>Point Place</i>as well. <br />
<br />
On the other hand, a power plant with high voltage substations can be very handy to map as an Area, as you'll see them quickly scanning the surrounding. Or, arriving at a industrial area, it definitely helps seeing more distinct destinations that helps to orientate.<br />
<br />
And last but not least an editor's note: many Area Places clutter WME as well: you might need to disable the layer of Places to be able to edit the roads. <br />
<!--To explain this a little more: Places smaller then 500m<sup>2</sup> we know from experiences they are not used as a visual distinct marker. However, they will show up when approaching them as your destination.--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Combined Places}}== <!--T:7--><br />
[[File:Wme places mall area with points.png|thumb|super|260px|Point Places within an Area Place]]<br />
<br />
<br><br />
Areas within Areas create grey layers over the map. <i>Point Places</i> within an <i>Area Place</i> are allowed and mostly used for shops in a shopping mall, faculties within a University campus, etc.. <br />
<br />
They can also be used to enter several distinctive entrances to an Area Place (e.g., arrival and departure hall of an airport), as long as multiple [[#Entry_point_.2F_the_navigation_goal|entry points]] are not functional.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=={{@|Places details}}== <!--T:9--><br />
Any Place - Point or Area - should contain as much useful information as possible. <br />
<br />
==={{@|General tab}}=== <!--T:10--><br />
The General tab for a <i>Place</i> is where you complete all of the basic information: categorie(s), name, description (if adding to the navigation), residential/public, country, state, city, street and house number. Depending on the category more options may be available, like the gas brand for [[Gas_Station_Place|gas stations]].<br />
<br />
<!--T:26--><br />
'''{{@|Category}}'''<br />
: Places need at least one <i>category</i> to be assigned, but may belong to several others. Always choose the main category first. For example, a Gas Station may also be “Convenience Store”, “Car Wash”, or “Charging Station”. An [[ATM_Place|ATM]] within a bank, should be added as secondary category as well. However, if the second category like the ATM is available outside the opening hours of the main place (like the bank), add it as a separate [[#Combined_Places|Point place]]. <br />
<br />
: If you cannot find a suitable category, choose "others" and add the ([[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in front of the name<br />
<br />
: As the categories are not localized, some entries need extra focus:<br />
:: <i>Hospital / Urgent Care</i>: To be used only for hospitals that have emergency care facilities. Waze will provide these in case of calamities. Hospital without emergency room need to be categorized as <i>Doctor / Clinic</i><br />
:: <br />
<br />
: For a more detailed explanation of categories, see the [[Place categories]] page.<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Address}}'''<br />
:If the road has a road number, use the plain street name without the number, eg: "Leuvensesteenweg" (not "N2 - Leuvensesteenweg").<br />
<br />
<!--T:27--><br />
'''{{@|Name}}'''<br />
:The naming of a <i>Place</i> should be done in the formal language of the location where the place is situated. Add other relevant information, such as brand (service stations).<br />
:In bi-lingual areas, use the alternate name.<br />
:In case you cannot find an applicable category for the <i>Place</i>, add the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Missing_Categories|missing]] category in the alternate name in front of the regular name.<br />
<br />
:There are 3 icons to replace the following words in the name while keeping the pronounciation (TTS). You can copy them from below:<br />
:⛽️ Gas station<br />
:✈ Airport<br />
:Ⓜ️ Metro<br />
Unfortunately, other icons don´t work as expected or not on all platforms, so please abstain from using other icons.<br />
<br />
<!--T:28--><br />
'''{{@|Description}}'''<br />
: Beware not to use the <i>Description</i> field for notes to other editors. This field is visible in the Waze app, and should only contain details pertinent to the Place itself.<br />
<br />
<!--T:29--><br />
'''{{@|Entry / exit points}}'''<br />
: Add, if necessary, an [[File:WME-entry point icon.PNG|20px]] [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|Entry / exit point]] so Waze is able to navigate you to the right side of the place.<br />
<br />
<!--T:30--><br />
'''{{@|External provider}}'''<br />
: Waze allows you to connect the <i>Place</i> to the POI from <i>external providers</i>. One of the providers is Google Maps. When a <i>Place</i> is linked, drivers can select any destination from search results in the app, whether the result is from Waze or Google, it will always lead you to the [[Places#Entry point .2F the navigation goal|navigation goal]] defined in Waze.<br />
<br />
<!--T:21--><br />
: If the <i>external provider</i> has more than one distinctive places defined for a <i>Place</i>, link to the most important one. Example: Underground station with several separate entrances, use the main entrance. For the others, you can add [[Places#Combined Places|multiple <i>Point Places</i>]] if it adds to navigation. Of course, if there are multiple places in the external provider that refer to only one entry, link them all to only one <i>Place</i>. <br />
<br />
<!--T:43--><br />
: ''Note'': Linking external providers is available from Level 2and up<br />
<br />
<!--T:31--><br />
In the picture below you see an example of details for the "Stade Roi Baudouin / Koning Boudewijn Stadium".<br />
<br />
[[File:Be-nl_Place-Koning-Boudewijn-Stadion.png]]<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|More Info tab}} === <!--T:11--><br />
You can provide the website address and phone number in the “More Info” tab. Here you can also add hours of operation and select optional services, like Wifi, Toilets, or Parking for customers (see also [[Parking Lot Place|Restricted Parking Lot Place]]) <!--Mo: removed following explanation for readability, and added link to info on restricted parking lot places (If they are bigger than 500m², then they can be drawn separately. see [[Parking Lot Place]]!)-->. Information in this tab is shown in the search results. From there you can click the website address or telephone number and activate your browser or phone function. Therefore, they should be in a usable format:<br />
<br />
<!--T:32--><br />
[[File:Be-APP_Places_Searchresult.png|thumb|right|super|280px|Search result as shown in the Waze app]]<br />
'''{{@|Website}}'''<br />
: The website address is best written as www.address.extension, like www.octaplus.be. Leave out http:// or https://.<br />
: Only one website can be added. If the website is multilingual and a choice has to be made, if possible default to English.<br />
<br />
<!--T:33--><br />
'''{{@|Telephone}}'''<br />
: Telephone numbers should best be written in international format: Generally, the number consists of the country code, followed by the area code (without 0), and than the subscribers number, all without dashes, slashes, brackets and the like. Formatting spaces are allowed but not necessary.<br />
:'''Belgium''': <br />
::+32 AA BB BB BB, or +32 A BBB BB BB for landlines, <br />
::+32 4AA BB BB BB or +32 4AA BBB BBB for mobile numbers<br />
:'''Luxembourg''':<br />
::+352 local number (varies in amount of numbers and areas)<br />
<br />
<!--T:40--><br />
'''{{@|Services}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME Places moreinfo services.png|110px]] Check the available services<br />
<br />
<!--T:18--><br />
'''{{@|Opening hours}}'''<br />
:[[File:WME_Places_moreinfo_openinghours.PNG|110px]] Add the opening hours if available.<br />
{{clear}}{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
=== {{@|Photos tab}} === <!--T:12--><br />
Any photos which drivers have added to a Place will appear in the "Photos" tab. Photos can only be uploaded via the Waze app, via a [[Place update request|Place update request (PUR)]]. In WME, we can moderate newly added photo's, and view and delete exisiting photos. Make a well thought-out decision about discarding a photo. Once a photo is deleted, it cannot be recovered. Delete only if the photo really is unclear, not helpful and/or inappropriate. For more guidelines on accepting or discarding photo's see the global Wiki page paragraph [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places#Place_Updates_.28Moderation.29 Place Updates (Moderation)].<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Lock Levels}} == <!--T:13--><br />
Locking policies vary across the regions, see the [[User:Moweez/Place_categories#Regional_differences|Regional_differences]] on the page about categories.<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
== {{@|Tools}} == <!--T:15--><br />
* <b>WME Place Interface Enhancements (WMEPIE)</b> Script adding functionality to Places, such as showing the size and possibility to resize area Places, buttons to zoom and center, quick categorization, auto set address, verify link with GM, etc.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/26340-wme-place-interface-enhancements Install and description]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=215990&start=280 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b> WME Split Split POI</b> <br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/13008-wme-split-poi Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=819&t=164743 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Color Highlights</b> Adds color highlighting to Places according to their status and type. Shows rivers blue in WME.<br />
: - [https://greasyfork.org/en/scripts/3206-wme-color-highlights Install]<br />
: - [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewtopic.php?t=40705 Discussion on the forum]<br />
* <b>WME Toolbox</b> can select and filter Places, and show the area size. And many more other tools, see [[Tools#Toolbox|Toolbox]]<br />
* [https://w-tools.org/PlaceBrowser Place Browser]<br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
<br />
==Further reading== <!--T:16--><br />
* [[Place update request]]<br />
* [[Flagged place]]<br />
* [https://support.google.com/waze/answer/7402261?hl=en Misplaced ad pins form] is intended for reporting issues with advertised places that are wrongly placed on the map. Requests of <b>L4</b> editors are automatically approved by Waze.<!--<br />
* See also the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Places Places].--><br />
{{BackToc{{#translation:}}}}<br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}<br />
[[Category:Editing{{#translation:}}]]<br />
[[Category:Places{{#translation:}}]]</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Waze_Map_Editor/fr&diff=24540Waze Map Editor/fr2020-08-23T14:40:05Z<p>Moweez: Text replacement - "[[User request" to "[[Update request"</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
==Editeur de cartes Waze==<br />
With the Waze Map Editor (WME) the Waze maps are maintained.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
The BeNeLux specifics of the WME are explained in:<br />
* [[Quick start guide]]<br />
<br /><br />
The global Wiki contains some pages on:<br />
* [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Map_Editing_Quick-start_Guide Tutorials for beginners]<br />
* [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Map_Editor_Interface_and_Controls WME Interface and Controls]<br />
* [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Best_map_editing_practice Best Practices]<br />
<br /><br />
An example is shown below:<br />
<br />
[[File:WmeScreen.jpg|600px]]<br />
<br />
===Location===<br />
For editing the map first goto the location where the editing has to be done If you have a '''[[PL]]''' paste in your browsers URL field otherwise find the location by using the search possibility top left corner of the screen:<br />
[[File:WME-SearchControl.jpg|400px]]<br />
<br />
===Layers menu===<br />
Top right hand corner contains the [[File:Layers-menu-icon.png]] icon via which the layers / options menu can be requested. With all layers selected the map can look very cluttered. Select only those layers you need for a certain task: like the satellite image, [[Places|places]], [[Road types|roads]], [[GPS|GPS points]] etcetera. <br />
<br />
===Flux===<br />
Onglet sur la gauche de WME listant les [[Update request/fr|UR's (demandes de mise à jour)]], [[Map Problems/fr|problèmes de carte]] et les [[Place update request/fr|PUR's (demande de mise à jours des POI's)]] dans la [[Editable area/fr|zone éditable]].<br />
<br />
===Trajets===<br />
Tab on left hand side with a listing of the latest drives. Short drives are often added immediately. Sometimes your drive information is not updated the same day, but in the end almost all drives appear in this list.<br /><br />
If you click on a drive the route you followed is displayed, but remember: you have to move the map yourself towards the location of the route.<br />
<br /><br />
===Areas===<br />
Tab on left hand side with links to the [[Editable area|editable areas]].<br /><br />
The areas that are shown are :<br />
* the areas you drove around while using [[Waze app|Waze]] and <br />
* areas you are assigned editing right as for instance [[Area Manager]] and<br />
* temporary areas while taken part in a [[Mapraid]].<br />
<br />
===Scripts===<br />
Functionality can be added to the WME by installing [[Scripts]]. <br /><br />
The WME tabs can be adjusted with the script [[WME Tab Manager]].<br />
<br />
===Map servers===<br />
There are currently three waze map servers: IL (Israel), NA (North America) and ROW (Rest of the world).<br />
The Benelux maps are on the ROW server. When you're working in the editor you'll see "row" as part of the URL.<br />
<br />
===Further reading ===<br />
* The global page, already mentioned above, [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Map_Editor_Interface_and_Controls Map Editor Interface and Controls] contains a complete description of the Waze Map Editor.<br />
* [[Additional editing tips]] page.<br />
* Visit the global page on [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/Map_Editing_Tips_and_Hints Map Editing Tips and Hints]<br />
* Waze Map Editor [https://www.waze.com/forum/viewforum.php?f=8 Forum page] with discussions, suggestions and version info.<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=UR_overview_page&diff=24539UR overview page2020-08-23T14:40:05Z<p>Moweez: Text replacement - "[[User request" to "[[Update request"</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><translate><br />
<br />
==UR Overview== <!--T:1--><br />
<i>Ron Sekkel</i> from Brasil created a tool to manage [[Update_request|UR's]].<br /><br />
The links for our countries are:<br />
* [http://wmebr.info/ur/ur_report.php?country=Belgium Belgium].<br />
* [http://wmebr.info/ur/ur_report.php?country=Luxembourg Luxemborg].<br />
<br /><br />
After clicking on an area in your country (State column) a new page is opened with the [[Update request|UR's]] of this area.<br /><br />
Clicking on a UR id opens the [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] with this UR selected.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
For this data displayed on a map click [https://wmebr.info/ur/ur_browser.php here].<br /><br />
<br /><br />
</translate> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Mapraid/nl&diff=24538Mapraid/nl2020-08-23T14:40:04Z<p>Moweez: Text replacement - "[[User request" to "[[Update request"</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
==Mapraid==<br />
MapRaid is a time-limited event during which map editors join together to resolve [[Map Problems|MP’s]], [[Update request|UR’s]], add and update [[Places]], fix connectivity problems, add missing roads, and add/edit speed limit data in a pre-determined [[Editable area|area]] of the map. <br /><br />
<br /><br />
See the [https://wazeopedia.waze.com/wiki/Global/MapRaid Global wiki page] on this subject.<br />
<br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=Area_Manager/nl&diff=24537Area Manager/nl2020-08-23T14:40:04Z<p>Moweez: Text replacement - "[[User request" to "[[Update request"</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
==Area Manager==<br />
[[File:Badge AreaManager.png|right]]<br />
<br />
* Als je <i>Area Manager</i> (AM) wil worden, moet je een Waze [[Community|community]] member zijn die een actieve en proactieve rol wil opnemen om een specifieke [[Editable area|gebied]] van de Waze kaart te onderhouden.<br />
* Om Area Manager te worden moet je dit aanvragen.<br /><br />
* Als je [[Editor level|editor level]] nog niet '''3''' is, zal je deze met de AM titel krijgen.<br />
<br />
=== Taken ===<br />
* Je [[Editable area|gebied]] in het oog houden wat betreft wegenwerken en de nodige aanpassingen op de kaart doen wanneer werken starten en eindigen door nieuwe geometrie, straten toe te voegen of te verwijderen en op- en afritten los te koppelen of te verbinden. <br />
* Reageren op [[Update request|UR's]].<br />
* [[Map Problems|Map errors/problemen]] verwerken en oplossen.<br />
* Snelheids- en roodlichtcamera's onderhouden en meldingen van Waze gebruikers verwerken.<br />
* Andere editors adviseren en als mentor optreden.<br />
* Actie ondernemen als je foute edits op de kaart tegenkomt.<br />
* En een actieve rol opnemen in de [[Community|community]] door in [[Slack]] en het [[Forum|forum]] actief te zijn.<br />
<br /><br />
Voor de volledige BeLux Waze doorgroeimogelijkheden bekijk de [[Community Levels]] pagina. <br />
<br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweezhttps://www.waze.com/wiki/Belgium/index.php?title=UR_overview_page/fr&diff=24536UR overview page/fr2020-08-23T14:40:04Z<p>Moweez: Text replacement - "[[User request" to "[[Update request"</p>
<hr />
<div>{{TopLine}}<br />
<languages /><br />
==Vue d'ensemble des UR==<br />
<i>Ron Sekkel</i> du Brésil a créé un outil pour gérer les [[Update request|UR's]].<br /><br />
Les liens pour nos pays sont:<br />
* [http://wmebr.info/ur/ur_report.php?country=Belgium Belgium].<br />
* [http://wmebr.info/ur/ur_report.php?country=Luxembourg Luxembourg].<br />
<br /><br />
Après avoir cliqué sur une zone de votre pays (colonne état), une nouvelle page s'ouvre avec les [[Update request|UR's]] de cette zone.<br /><br />
Cliquer sur une identifiant d'UR ouvre le [[Waze Map Editor|WME]] avec cette UR sélectionnée.<br /><br />
<br /><br />
Pour afficher cette information sur une carte, cliquer [https://wmebr.info/ur/ur_browser.php ici].<br /><br />
<br /> <br />
{{Bottomline}}</div>Moweez